Skip to main content

Full text of "Neoplatonism in relation to Christianity : an essay"

See other formats


W  UC-NRLF 


Eflb    fllS 


NEOPLATONISM 

IN    RELATION    TO 

CHRISTIANITY 


CAMBRIDGE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS   WAREHOUSE, 

C.  F.  CLAY,   MANAGER. 
ILontJon:   FETTER   LANE,    E.G. 

ffifcmiwrgl) :    too,   PRINCES  STREET. 


fLetpjifj:    F.  A.   BROCKHAUS. 

Berlin:    A.  ASHER  AND  CO. 

£ebj  Sorb:    G.  P.   PUTNAM'S  SONS. 

»ombas.  anD  Calcutta:    MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LTD. 


[All  Rights  reserved} 


NEOPLATONISM 

IN   RELATION   TO 

CHRISTIANITY 

AN    ESSAY 


CHARLES   ELSEE,   M.A. 

Sometime  Scholar  and  Naden  Divinity  Student 
of  St  John's  College,  Cambridge 


CAMBRIDGE  : 

at  the  University  Press 

1908 


Cantbrttige : 

PRINTED   BY  JOHN   CLAY,   M.A. 
AT  THE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS. 


GENERAL 


PREFACE 

THE    following   pages  are  the  expansion  of  an 
essay  which  was  awarded  the  Hulsean  Prize 
in   1901,  and  they  are  now  published  in  accordance 
with  the  terms  of  that  bequest.     In  apologising  for 
the  long  interval  which  has  elapsed  between  the  award 
of  the  prize  and  the  publication  of  the  essay,  the 
author  can   only  plead  the  pressure  of  other  work, 
first  at  a  College  Mission  in  Walworth,  and  latterly 
at   Leeds.      At  the  same  time  this  very  delay  has 
enabled  him  to  grasp  what  a  real  bearing  the  specu- 
lations of  the  Neoplatonists,  and  their  adaptations  by 
the  Christian  Fathers,  have  upon  much  that  is  being 
said  and  written  at  the  present  day.     Let  the  reader 
for  instance  compare  what  Plotinus  or  Augustine  has 
to  say  on  the  subject  of  evil  with  the  teaching  of  the 
"  New  Theology,"  and  he  will  at  once  see  how  thoughts 
which  are  floating  in  men's  minds  to-day  have  been 
expressed  with  discrimination  in  the  past.    Or  let  him 
join  the  crowd  that  listens  to  the  street-corner  preacher 
of  materialism,  and  then  notice  how  *  Dionysius '  deals 
with  the  question  of  finite  man's  comprehension  of  an 
infinite  God.     Truly,  if  we  wish  to  see  beyond  the 

182302 


VI  PREFACE 

giants   of  the   past,  there   is    much   to   be  said    for 
climbing  on  their  shoulders. 

The  subject  of  the  essay  is  "  Neoplatonism  in  re- 
lation to  Christianity."  The  addition  of  this  qualifying 
clause  serves  to  limit  the  field  of  the  enquiry,  and 
to  differentiate  its  object  from  that  of  a  history  of 
philosophy.  The  writer  of  such  a  history  regards 
Neoplatonism  purely  from  a  philosophical  stand- 
point. He  draws  out  its  relation  to  earlier  and 
later  systems,  and  seeks  to  assign  to  it  its  proper 
place  in  the  development  of  human  thought.  Neo- 
platonism however  was  not  merely  a  great  philo- 
sophical revival :  it  was  a  part  of  a  yet  greater 
religious  movement:  and  it  is  the  latter  aspect 
which  this  essay  has  to  set  forth. 

For  nearly  two  hundred  years  the  Christian 
Church  had  been  increasing,  alike  in  numerical 
strength  and  in  intellectual  vigour,  until  it  threatened 
not  only  to  rival  but  absolutely  to  overpower  the  old 
pagan  system  of  the  Roman  Empire.  Persecution 
had  been  employed  against  it  in  vain.  It  gradually 
became  obvious  that  if  the  new  sect  was  to  be  exter- 
minated, methods  must  be  adopted  far  more  vigorous 
and  systematic  than  most  of  the  Emperors  were  able 
or  willing  to  employ,  and  the  last  and  most  statesman- 
like of  the  persecutors  endeavoured  not  so  much  to 
destroy  Christianity,  as  to  reduce  it  to  its  original 
position  as  a  mean  and  vulgar  superstition  of  the 
lower  classes. 

But  direct  persecution  was  not  the  only  weapon 
which  was  levelled  against  the  new  religion.  There 
were  intervals  of  rest  for  the  Church,  during  which 


PREFACE  Vll 

the  struggle  was  carried  on  in  the  form  of  literary 
controversy ;  and  Neoplatonism  was  the  greatest  of 
these  attempts  to  meet  Christianity  on  its  own  ground, 
and  by  fair  argument  to  show  the  superiority  of  the 
old  paganism. 

Accordingly  the  first  chapter  of  this  essay  has 
been  devoted  to  the  discussion  of  the  actual  state  of 
religion  in  the  heathen  world,  at  the  commencement 
of  the  third  century  of  the  Christian  era.  The  next 
two  chapters  deal  with  the  relation  of  Neoplatonism 
to  earlier  systems  of  Greek  speculation  and  with  the 
first  beginnings  of  Christian  philosophy,  whilst  a 
fourth  chapter  has  been  given  up  to  the  general 
history  of  the  school,  together  with  the  names  of 
contemporary  Christian  writers.  In  the  fifth  chapter 
will  be  found  a  more  detailed  discussion  of  the 
mutual  relations  between  Church  and  School,  trac- 
ing their  development  from  apparent  alliance  to 
bitter  antagonism,  and  again,  after  this  period  of 
antagonism,  to  the  gradual  absorption  of  Neoplatonic 
principles  by  the  Church. 

C.  E. 

CLERGY  HOUSE,  LEEDS. 
October  9,   1908. 


CONTENTS 

CHAP.  PAGE 

I.        ROMAN   RELIGION   IN  THE  THIRD  CENTURY        .  I 

II.       EARLIER  SYSTEMS   OF   GREEK   PHILOSOPHY          .  22 

III.  THE     FIRST    BEGINNINGS    OF    CHRISTIAN    PHI- 

LOSOPHY            41 

IV.  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM         .          .           .  51 

V.        THE  RELATIONS  BETWEEN  NEOPLATONISM  AND 

CHRISTIANITY 82 

INDEX 141 


LIST   OF   MODERN    WORKS   CONSULTED 

J.  C.  I.  GlESELER,   Text-book  of  Ecclesiastical  History,  1836. 
A.  N BANDER,   History  of  Christian   Religion,  trans.   Torrey, 

1850-58. 

F.  UEBERWEG,  History  of  Philosophy,  Eng.  trans.  1872. 
F.   D.   MAURICE,  Moral  and  Metaphysical  Philosophy,   1873. 
A.  HARNACK,  History  of  Dogma,  trans.  Millar,  1897. 
J.  E.  ERDMANN,  History  of  Philosophy,  trans.  Hough,  1898. 
J.  B.  CROZIER,  History  of  Intellectual  Development,  1897. 
H.  H.  MlLMAN,  History  of  Latin  Christianity,  4th  Ed.  1883. 
RlTTER    and    PRELLER,    Historia   Philosophiae   Graecae,  ed. 

Wellman,  1898. 

SMITH  and  WAGE,  Dictionary  of  Christian  Biography,  1877- 

1887. 

J.  REVILLE,  La  Religion  a  Rome  sous  les  Severes,  1886. 
E.  HERRIOT,  Philon  le  Juif,  1898. 
J.  DRUMMOND,  Philo  Judaeus,  1888. 
E.  DE  FAYE,  Clement  d' Alexandria,  1898. 
T.  WHITTAKER,   The  Neoplatonists,  1901. 
T.TAYLOR,  Selected  works  of  Plotinus,  translated,  ed.  Mead,  1895. 
C.  BIGG,  Christian  Platonists  of  Alexandria,  1886. 
W.  R.  INGE,  Christian  Mysticism,  1899. 
A.  ZIMMERN,  Porphyry  to  Marcella,  1896. 


Xll  MODERN    WORKS   CONSULTED 

B.  F.  WESTCOTT,  Religious  Thought  in  the  West,  1891. 

G.  H.  KENDALL,  The  Emperor  Julian,  1879. 

A.  GARDNER,  Synesius  of  Cyrene,  1886. 

J.  C.  NlCOL,  Synesius  of  Cyrene,  His  Life  and  Writings,  1887. 

T.  R.  GLOVER,  Life  and  Letters  in  the  Fourth  Century,  1901. 

L.  GRANDGEORGE,  St  Augustin  et  le  Ndoplatonisme,  1896. 

E.  W.  WATSON,  Hilary  of  Poictiers  (Library  of  Nicene  and 

Post-Nicene  Fathers  IX,  1899). 
W.  MOORE  and  H.  A.  WILSON,  Gregory  of  Nyssa  (Library  of 

Nicene  and  Post-Nicene  Fathers  v,  1893). 
H.  F.  STEWART,  Boethius,  1891. 


CHAPTER   I 

ROMAN    RELIGION    IN    THE   THIRD    CENTURY 

THE  period  in  which  Neoplatonism  takes  its  rise 
is  essentially  an  age  of  transition.  Lying  as  it  does 
between  the  age  of  pure  Grseco-Roman  paganism  and 
the  final  triumph  of  Christianity,  it  is  the  period  in 
which  both  of  the  opposing  forces  are  making  their 
preparations  for  the  last  great  struggle.  Paganism 
arms  itself  with  the  new  philosophy  and  summons  to 
its  aid  all  the  forces  of  Roman  conservatism  ;  whilst 
Christianity,  which  has  already  in  great  measure 
secured  its  hold  on  the  masses  now  attacks  the 
highest  circles  of  society,  and  endeavours  to  satisfy 
the  craving  for  a  true  system  of  religious  philosophy. 

But  before  entering  upon  a  detailed  discussion 
of  the  religion  of  the  Roman  Empire  in  the  third 
century1,  we  may  by  way  of  introduction  take  a 
passing  glance  at  the  picture  which  Lucian  gives  of 

1  Throughout  this  chapter  I  have  ventured  for  the  sake  of  brevity  to 
employ,  without  further  qualification,  the  phrase  "the  third  century." 
The  period  discussed  would  be  more  accurately  described  as  the  half 
century  between  the  death  of  Commodus  and  the  accession  of  Philippus 
Arabs ;  commencing  with  the  accession  of  Septimius  Severus  in  193  A.D., 
and  extending  to  the  death  of  Gordianus  Junior  in  the  year  244. 

E.   N.  I 


2  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

Roman  society  and  religion  in  the  earlier  part  of  the 
second.  Shallow  and  heartless  as  he  is,  he  neverthe- 
less occupies  a  position  of  his  own.  When  considering 
the  evidence  of  the  Christian  apologists  we  are  some- 
times tempted  to  think  that  it  must  be  prejudiced. 
The  writers  are  carrying  on  a  controversy  against  a 
system  for  which  they  feel  that  they  have  something 
better  to  substitute,  and  whose  weak  points  they  are 
bound,  in  spite  of  themselves,  to  exaggerate.  They 
are  liable  to  persecution,  and  therefore  they  may  tend 
to  overestimate  their  own  simple  faith  and  purity  in 
contrast  with  the  unbelief  and  licentiousness  of  the 
pagan  world  around  them.  But  Lucian's  position  is 
different.  He  feels  no  fear  of  persecution.  He  has 
no  special  wish  to  regenerate  or  to  reform  mankind. 
He  is  a  satirist,  who  writes  in  order  to  amuse  himself 
by  showing  his  utter  contempt  for  the  dead  system 
that  claimed  to  be  the  religion  of  the  Empire. 

This  contempt  is  of  course  most  openly  expressed 
in  such  works  as  the  Juppiter  Tragoedus  and  the 
Dialogues  of  the  Gods.  But  even  if  we  leave  these 
satirical  works  on  one  side,  we  still  find  in  Lucian  the 
clearest  evidence  of  the  low  state  into  which  religion 
had  fallen.  The  memoir  of  Alexander  the  False 
Prophet  and  the  account  of  the  Death  of  Peregrinus 
are  documents  of  considerable  historical  value ;  and 
in  these  we  see,  on  the  one  hand  the  love  of  notoriety 
for  which  Peregrinus  is  ready  to  pay  the  price  even 
of  self-immolation ;  and,  on  the  other,  the  blind 
credulity  on  which  Alexander  is  able  to  work  by  the 
crudest  of  methods — a  credulity  which  is  not  limited 
to  the  ignorant  peasants  of  Asia  Minor,  but  extends 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  3 

to  the  highest  circles  of  Roman  society.  And  in 
both  works  alike  we  see  the  love  of  sensation  which 
has  taken  the  place  of  the  old  Roman  reverence  for 
religion. 

It  is  a  matter  for  regret  that  Lucian  has  not  given 
us  a  more  complete  account  of  the  Christians  of  his 
day.  The  Church  was  passing  through  a  great  crisis: 
she  had  to  face  the  question  whether  she  was  to 
remain  a  small  society  of  religious  devotees,  or  to  go 
forward  and  take  her  place  at  the  head  of  the  great 
religions  of  the  world.  The  Montanists  preferred  to 
remain  where  they  were :  the  Church  as  a  whole 
decided  to  go  forward.  At  such  a  time  the  evidence 
of  a  writer  like  Lucian  would  have  been  of  peculiar 
interest.  But  he  passes  over  Christianity  almost  in 
silence.  In  his  authentic  works  there  are  perhaps 
not  more  than  two  direct  references  to  it.  He  tells 
us1  that  Alexander  was  wont,  at  the  commencement 
of  his  "Mysteries"  to  cry  "If  any  Atheist  or  Christian 
or  Epicurean  have  come  to  spy  upon  the  Ceremonies, 
let  him  flee."  And  it  is  to  be  remembered  that 
Alexander  would  be  no  mean  judge  of  the  audience 
best  suited  for  his  purpose,  so  that  his  warning  cry 
suggests  that  the  Christians  at  this  time  were  not 
all  such  simple  and  credulous  folk  as  we  are  some- 
times inclined  to  suppose.  The  other  reference  to 
Christianity  occurs  in  the  account  of  Peregrinus2. 
In  his  younger  days  this  person  had  professed  himself 
a  Christian,  and  Lucian  describes  with  mingled 
admiration  and  contempt  the  way  in  which  his  fellow- 
Christians  tended  him  during  an  imprisonment  for 

1  Lucian,  Alex.  38.  *  Lucian,  De  Morte  Peregrini,  12. 

1—2 


4  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [I 

the  sake  of  the  faith.  This  is  the  passage  that  gives 
us  the  clearest  view  of  Lucian's  own  ideas  upon  the 
subject  of  Christianity.  It  is  too  much  to  say  with 
Suidas  that  he  is  a  blasphemer ;  for  that  charge  can 
only  be  made  good  by  reference  to  the  pseudo- 
Lucianic  Philopatris.  In  the  account  of  Peregrinus1, 
the  reference  to  "their  crucified  sophist"  expresses 
rather  pity  for  Christian  credulity  than  downright 
contempt 

Such  are  the  only  direct  references  to  Christianity 
which  are  to  be  found  in  Lucian's  writings.  It  is 
clear  that  the  subject  had  but  little  interest  for  him. 
It  failed  to  excite  his  curiosity,  and  he  practically 
ignores  it. 

With  regard  however  to  the  condition  of  pagan 
thought  in  his  day,  Lucian  is  a  most  valuable  witness. 
He  is  a  man  of  considerable  ability,  at  once  thoroughly 
versatile  and  thoroughly  sceptical,  whilst  his  detached 
attitude  lends  especial  weight  to  his  opinions.  The 
impression  that  we  gain  from  a  study  of  his  writings 
is  that  there  was  no  central  force  in  paganism  at  this 
time :  the  old  powers  were  found  to  be  effete,  or,  at 
the  best,  to  be  spasmodic  and  local  in  their  effects, 
and  it  seemed  as  though  the  whole  system  were 
crumbling  away  through  sheer  inability  to  survive. 

But  it  must  not  be  assumed  that  this  would  be 
equally  true  as  a  description  of  the  religion  of  the 
Empire  half  a  century  later.  In  the  period  between 
Lucian  and  Plotinus  there  occurred  an  extraordinary 
revival  or  recrudescence  of  paganism.  This  was  not 
merely  a  revival  of  external  ceremonial,  such  as  took 

1  Ib.  13- 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  5 

place  in  the  time  of  Augustus.  It  was  a  genuine  refor- 
mation, and  it  led  to  the  growth  of  a  more  spiritual 
religion  than  the  Roman  world  had  ever  known. 

Of  this  revival  of  paganism  no  contemporary 
historian  has  left  us  a  complete  account.  Indirect 
evidence  however  is  not  wanting.  It  is  to  be  derived 
in  abundance  from  sources  at  once  numerous  and 
varied.  Much  can  be  gathered  from  heathen  writers, 
— from  historians  like  Dio  Cassius  and  Lampridius, 
from  philosophers  like  Porphyry,  and  from  sophists  like 
Philostratus.  Further  contributions  may  be  levied 
from  Christian  writers,  from  Clement  of  Alexandria 
and  Origen,  from  Tertullian  and  Augustine.  Nor 
must  the  evidence  of  inscriptions  be  neglected,  which 
is  invaluable,  in  this  as  in  other  cases,  as  affording 
contemporary  corroboration  to  the  statements  of  our 
other  authorities. 

The  characteristic  note  of  Roman  society  at  this 
period  was  its  cosmopolitanism.  More  than  one  gene- 
ration had  passed  away  since  Juvenal  uttered  his 
lament1  that  the  Orontes  was  emptying  itself  into 
the  Tiber,  and  no  attempt  had  been  made  to  check 
the  stream  of  foreign  immigration.  The  aristocracy 
of  the  second  century,  liberal  and  progressive  as  it 
had  been  in  matters  of  legislation,  had  been  com- 
paratively conservative  in  matters  of  religion.  But 
the  end  of  that  century  witnessed  a  change.  The 
religious  revival  of  this  period  affected  all  classes  of 
pagan  society,  and  the  enthusiasm  which  it  aroused 
was  expended  as  much  in  the  welcoming  of  new 
divinities  as  in  the  service  of  the  old  ones. 

1  Juv.  3.  62. 


O  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [I 

The  mere  number  of  gods  and  goddesses  who 
*  succeeded  in  obtaining  recognition  in  the  Empire  at 
this  time  is  astounding.  It  is  impossible  within  the 
limits  of  the  present  chapter  to  do  more  than  mention 
the  principal  classes  into  which  they  fall,  and  to 
touch  upon  one  or  two  of  the  most  important  of  the 
deities.  The  old  Roman  gods  were  still  the  official 
guardians  of  the  state1.  Their  temples  continued  to 
stand  in  unimpaired  splendour ;  they  themselves  still 
received  sacrifices  on  all  important  occasions ;  and 
the  office  of  Pontifex  Maximus  was  still  conferred 
upon  each  successive  Emperor.  The  old  colleges  of 
priests,  augurs,  and  the  like,  still  existed,  and  member- 
ship in  them  was  an  honour  that  was  much  sought 
after ;  whilst  the  various  guilds  and  societies  for 
purposes  of  trade  or  of  mutual  benefit  all  had  their 
religious  aspects. 

Of  the  cults  which  became  prevalent  after  the  fall 
of  the  Republic,  the  most  widespread  was  the  worship 
of  the  Emperor2.  As  a  general  rule  the  Romans  did 
not  attempt  to  impose  the  worship  of  their  gods  upon 
conquered  peoples,  but  in  this  particular  case  they 
made  an  exception.  The  worship  of  the  Emperor 
was  enforced  in  order  to  add  to  the  stability  of  the 
"  Empire,  by  causing  men's  religious  emotions  to  be 
centred  on  the  man  in  whom  the  executive  power 
was  vested,  and  thus  to  efface  those  rivalries  between 
the  various  towns  and  tribes  which  tended  to  foster  a 
local  and  national  rather  than  an  imperial  patriotism. 
As  each  town  was  merged  in  the  vast  Empire,  the 

1  J.  Reville,  La  Religion  a  Rome  sous  Us  Stvtres,  p.  26. 

2  Reville,  p.  30. 


Ij  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  7 

importance  of  local  politics  and  local  religion  tended 
to  decline,  and  the  place  of  the  local  deity  was  taken 
by  the  Genius  of  the  Empire,  worshipped  in  concrete 
form  in  the  person  of  the  Emperor. 

To  the  student  of  Church  History  this  cult  is  of 
the  greatest  importance.  Its  enforced  observance 
formed,  in  times  of  persecution,  the  dividing  line 
between  Christian  and  Pagan,  and  refusal  to  sacrifice 
to  the  Emperor  was  regarded  as  a  species  of  treason. 
For  the  purposes  of  this  essay  its  chief  importance 
lies  in  the  fact  that  it  is  one  of  the  signs  that  the 
general  drift  of  paganism  tended  towards  some  form 
of  monotheism.  The  office,  rather  than  the  person 
of  the  reigning  Emperor,  was  the  real  object  of 
worship  :  and  the  many  inscriptions  extant  in  honour 
of  the  Wisdom,  Justice  or  Clemency  of  the  Emperor 
show  how  completely  he  had  come  to  be  regarded 
as  a  secondary  providence,  visible,  accessible,  and  on 
earth  ;  a  divinity  so  near  at  hand  that,  according  to 
Tertullian1,  men  were  more  ready  to  perjure  them- 
selves by  all  the  gods  than  by  the  Genius  of  the 
Emperor.  At  the  same  time,  the  apotheosis  of 
departed  Emperors  did  not  tend  to  raise  the  tone  of 
heathenism.  Rather  it  served  to  diminish  the  value 
of  deity  and  to  place  an  efficient  weapon  in  the  hands 
of  those  who  wished  to  bring  discredit  upon  paganism. 

The  reigning  Emperor  was  usually  worshipped, 
not  in  person,  but  through  the  medium  of  his  Genius*. 
But  the  possession  of  a  Genius  was  not  the  prerogative 
of  the  Emperor  alone.  There  was  a  special  Genius 
for  every  man,  every  family,  every  nation  ;  we  even 

1  Tert.  Apol.  28.  2  Reville,  p.  39. 


8  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [I 

find  them  assigned  to  the  gods.  Their  worship  was  a 
survival  from  the  primitive  Roman  religion  which 
recognised  a  special  deity  for  every  single  department 
of  life :  but  the  current  ideas  about  the  precise  nature 
of  Genii  had  been  considerably  modified  by  the 
Greek  notions  about  daemons,  and  it  would  seem  that 
in  the  third  century  there  was  a  considerable  variety 
in  the  opinions  prevalent  upon  the  subject.  They 
were  regarded,  sometimes  as  immanent  in  the  persons 
or  things  to  which  they  were  attached,  sometimes  as 
entirely  external :  some  Genii  were  almost  on  a  level 
with  the  gods,  others  again  were  but  little  higher  in 
the  scale  of  being  than  their  charges.  The  Genius  of 
each  individual  corresponds  closely  to  the  Christian 
conception  of  a  guardian  angel ;  as  compared  with 
the  gods  he  resembles  the  family  doctor,  who  watches 
over  the  wellbeing  of  his  charges  on  all  ordinary  occa- 
sions, whilst  they  are  the  specialists,  one  or  another  of 
whom  is  summoned  in  cases  of  emergency. 

Similar  to  the  Genii  were  a  number  of  personifi- 
cations of  abstract  qualities  to  whom  worship  was 
offered.  Such  were  Honos,  Spes,  Libertas,  Virtus  \ 
the  object  worshipped  being  in  each  case  the  Genius 
of  the  quality  named.  How  far  these  were  mere 
abstractions,  and  to  what  extent  they  were  regarded 
as  actual  deities,  the  worshipper  himself  would  pro- 
bably have  found  it  hard  to  explain. 

The  belief  in  Genii  was  not  merely  a  vulgar 
superstition.  The  philosophers  recognised  a  world  of 
spirits  intermediate  between  gods  and  men  :  beings 
whom  Celsus  describes1  as  the  proconsuls  or  satraps 

1  Cf.  Orig.  c.  Cels.  8.  35. 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  9 

of  the  gods,  and  whom  Plotinus  defines1  as  eternal 
like  the  gods,  but  participating  in  the  material  world 
like  men.  There  is  also,  in  the  writings  of  the 
Christian  Fathers,  ample  evidence  of  a  firm  belief  in 
angelic  powers  :  and,  more  than  this,  the  Fathers  do 
not  throw  any  doubt  upon  either  the  existence  or  the 
potency  of  the  spirits  worshipped  by  the  pagans2. 
They  differ  from  heathen  writers  only  in  maintaining 
that  these  particular  spirits  are  invariably  evil. 

The  foregoing  deities,  however  orientalised  their 
worship  may  have  become,  were  at  least  Roman  in 
origin.  But  the  greater  part  of  the  conglomeration 
of  creeds,  which  formed  the  religion  of  the  Empire, 
was  derived  from  foreign  sources3.  Egypt  and 
Carthage,  Phrygia  and  Syria,  all  sent  their  respective 
contingents  to  the  Roman  pantheon :  even  the  wild 
German  tribes  were  not  unrepresented.  It  was  the 
necessary  result  of  the  mixed  character  of  the 
population.  Eastern  slaves  carried  with  them  super- 
stitions from  the  East :  merchants  of  Alexandria 
brought  with  them  Egyptian  gods  as  well  as  their 
wares  ;  above  all,  the  soldiers,  recruited  mainly  from 
the  frontiers  of  the  Empire,  carried  their  own  deities 
and  their  own  forms  of  worship  wherever  they  went. 
Sooner  or  later  the  strange  gods  drifted  to  Rome, 
and,  once  planted,  their  worship  was  bound  to  spread. 
The  mere  novelty  of  these  foreign  cults  made  them 
objects  of  curiosity :  the  penal  enactments,  which 
still  existed  though  never  enforced,  against  those  who 
encouraged  strange  rites,  may  have  served  to  give 

1  Plot.  Enn.  3.  5,  6.  2  Cf.  Tert.  Apol.  22. 

3  Reville,  p.  47. 


10  ROMAN   RELIGION    IN  [I 

them  the  added  attractiveness  of  forbidden  fruit ; 
whilst  they  received  a  further  impetus  from  the  fact 
that  many  of  them  possessed  special  orders  of  priests 
whose  sole  business  lay  in  the  propagation  of  their 
religion.  But  the  true  cause  of  their  success  lay  in 
the  inability  of  the  old  Roman  religion  to  satisfy  the 
spiritual  longings  of  the  people.  The  old  worship 
had  served  so  long  as  Rome  was  struggling  for  bare 
existence ;  but  even  before  the  beginning  of  the 
Empire  there  were  signs  of  the  prevalence  of  a 
profound  sense  of  religious  discontent.  Something 
less  barren,  less  utterly  unspiritual,  was  required,  and 
any  cult  that  claimed  to  supply  this  need  was  sure  to 
be  welcomed. 

Foremost  among  the  Eastern  divinities,  which 
came  crowding  into  all  parts  of  the  Empire,  stands 
the  Egyptian  Isis.  Temples  and  statues  without 
number  were  erected  in  her  honour :  the  Emperors 
themselves  took  part  in  her  processions.  She  was 
originally  the  personification  of  the  female  element 
in  nature,  but  as  time  went  on  she  assumed  the 
attributes  of  several  Greek  and  Roman  goddesses — 
Juno,  Ceres,  Proserpine  and  Venus — and  became 
moreover  the  patroness  of  shipping  and  commerce. 
She  possessed  not  only  an  elaborate  priesthood,  but 
a  lower  order  of  mendicant  brethren ;  and  the 
magnificent  ritual  in  her  temples,  alike  in  the  daily 
worship  and  on  the  occasion  of  great  festivals,  cannot 
but  have  had  its  effect  on  the  popular  mind. 

The  other  chief  Egyptian  deities  were  Osiris,  the 
dog-headed  Anubis,  and  Serapis,  who  afterwards 
gained  greater  popularity  even  than  Isis.  In  the 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  II 

time  of  the  Syrian  Emperors,  and  in  particular  under 
Septimius  Severus,  Caracalla,  and  Alexander  Severus, 
these  Egyptian  divinities  were  in  high  favour. 

It  is  impossible  here  to  discuss  in  detail  the 
systems  that  were  introduced  from  Phrygia,  Syria 
and  Phoenicia.  There  was  a  certain  similarity,  alike 
in  organization  and  in  ritual,  between  all  these 
Eastern  religions.  They  usually  had  an  order  of 
priests  :  often  also  an  order  of  mendicant  friars,  whose 
sole  claim  to  sanctity  seems,  in  some  cases,  to  have 
consisted  in  their  profession  of  poverty.  Their  ritual 
was  characterized  by  the  prevalence  of  "  mysteries " 
and  by  elaborate  ceremonial,  every  detail  of  which 
had  its  allegorical  meaning.  But  they  drew  their 
supporters  from  a  lower  stratum  of  society  than  that 
with  which  we  are  concerned.  They  could  not  claim 
the  immemorial  antiquity  of  the  Egyptian  cults,  and 
there  was  moreover  about  them  a  certain  lack  of 
refinement,  which  could  not  but  be  distasteful  to  the 
philosophical  mind.  They  were  tolerated,  as  meeting 
the  religious  needs  of  those  to  whom  they  appealed  ; 
but  they  failed  to  secure  the  respect  and  adherence  of 
men  of  culture. 

There  remains  however  one  deity  who  must  not 
be  passed  over1.  This  is  Mithras,  the  one  Persian 
divinity  who  acquired  a  hold  on  the  Roman  Empire. 
We  first  hear  of  his  being  brought  to  Rome  in 
connexion  with  Pompey's  suppression  of  the  Cilician 
pirates2;  but  his  worship  attracted  but  little  attention 
in  the  West  until  the  middle  of  the  second  century 
of  the  Christian  era.  Then  the  Oriental  tendency, 

1  Reville,  p.  77.  2  67  B.C.    Cf.  Plutarch,  Pomp.  24. 


12  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

discernible  at  Rome  under  the  Antonines,  brought 
him  into  favour  :  Antoninus  Pius  built  a  temple  in 
his  honour  at  Ostia,  and  Marcus  Aurelius  built 
another  on  the  Vatican.  At  this  period  he  is  men- 
tioned, with  disdain  it  is  true,  but  none  the  less  with 
obvious  apprehension  in  Lucian's  Council  of  the  Gods^. 
Under  the  Severi  his  popularity  grew  by  leaps  and 
bounds,  and  it  looked  as  though  in  another  generation 
he  would  reign  supreme. 

To  the  Roman,  Mithras  was  essentially  the  Sun- 
god  of  purity  and  power,  able  and  willing  to  protect 
his  worshippers  in  this  world  and  the  next.  He  was 
regarded  as  the  creator  of  the  world,  the  deliverer 
from  cold  and  darkness.  To  many  of  his  worshippers 
the  moral  and  mystical  teaching  was  of  far  greater 
importance  than  the  doctrine  of  Mithras  as  the  ruler 
of  the  physical  world.  His  mysteries  dealt  probably 
for  the  most  part  with  the  future  destiny  of  the  soul, 
of  which  he  is  regarded  as  the  saviour  and  regenerator. 
In  the  Mithraic  catacomb  on  the  Appian  Way2  the 
course  of  the  soul  after  death  is  described  :  we  see  it 
escorted  by  Mercury  before  Pluto  and  Proserpine,  in 
the  presence  of  the  Fates,  and  finally  conducted  to 
the  banquet  of  the  just 

Mithras-worship  has  been  described  as  the  pagan 
form  of  Gnosticism3.  In  both  alike  may  be  traced 
the  love  of  mystical  speculation ;  the  growth  of  the 
idea  of  redemption  ;  the  belief  that  proper  ritual 
could  atone  for  a  life  of  evil.  It  is  interesting  to 
notice  that  a  worshipper  could  make  atonement 

1  Deor.  Cone.  9.  2  Reville,  p.  94. 

3  Reville,  p.  93. 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  13 

without  himself  undergoing  the  strain  and  discomfort 
of  the  ritual.  For  instance,  the  most  striking  of  all 
the  rites  of  Mithras  was  the  Taurobolium,  or  baptism 
of  blood1.  This  ceremony,  whereby  the  worshipper 
was  drenched  with  the  warm  blood  that  flowed  from 
the  victim's  throat,  was  supposed  to  bring  certain 
regeneration.  And  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  could 
be  performed  on  a  priest  for  the  benefit  of  some  other 
person.  The  stress  was  laid  on  the  opus  operatum  of 
the  magical  sacrament,  not  on  the  bodily  presence  of 
the  individual  for  whose  benefit  it  was  offered. 

We  cannot  here  discuss  the  relation  of  Mithras- 
worship  to  Christianity.  The  early  Christians  were 
well  aware  of  the  similarity  between  the  rites  of 
Mithras  and  those  of  the  Church.  Actual  connexion 
however  there  appears  not  to  have  been,  though 
Justin  Martyr2  and  Tertullian8  denounce  the  washing 
of  neophytes,  the  confirmation  of  the  initiated,  and 
the  consecration  of  bread  and  water,  as  diabolical 
parodies  of  Christian  sacraments. 

The  worship  of  Mithras  spread  rapidly,  and  at  one 
time  bid  fair  to  become  the  final  religion  of  the 
Empire.  The  high  morality  that  it  inculcated,  and 
the  almost  military  discipline  that  it  maintained  in 
its  vast  body  of  devotees  seemed  to  give  a  promise 
of  permanence  which  the  other  pagan  systems  could 
not  offer.  But  it  was  not  to  be.  After  the  time  of 
Julian,  Christianity  took  its  place  as  the  dominant 
religion  of  the  West ;  and  in  later  days  Mahom- 
medanism  drove  out  Mithras-worship  from  its  last 
strongholds  in  the  Eastern  Empire. 

1  Reville,  p.  96.  2  Apol.  i.  66.  3  De  Praescr.  40. 


14  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

Such  are  a  few  of  the  main  types  of  religion 
prevalent  in  the  Roman  Empire  during  the  third 
century.  No  attempt  has  been  made  to  give  a 
complete  catalogue  of  the  gods  who  received  worship 
at  this  period :  whole  classes  have  been  omitted 
altogether,  and  no  class  has  been  described  in  its 
entirety.  But  the  sketch,  fragmentary  as  it  is,  may 
help  to  make  clear  the  kind  of  religion  which  many 

1  of  the  Neoplatonists  felt  themselves  called  upon  to 
defend.  Its  most  striking  characteristic  is  perhaps 

,  toleration.  Never  in  the  history  of  Western  civilisa- 
tion have  so  many  deities  been  recognised  at  the  same 
time.  And,  paradoxical  as  it  may  appear,  the  general 
result  of  this  excessive  polytheism  was  to  cause  a 

'  strong  current  of  feeling  towards  monotheism.  Each 
deity  was  regarded  as  one  particular  form  of  "the 

.  Divine,"  and  this  idea  received  confirmation  from  the 
partial  identity  of  the  symbols  and  attributes  ascribed 
to  different  gods. 

This  is  the  method  by  which  the  philosophers 
reconcile  themselves  to  polytheism.  "  There  is  one 
sun  and  one  sky  over  all  nations"  says  Plutarch1, 
"and  one  deity  under  many  names."  Even  Celsus 
recognises  one  deity  alone,  but  he  recommends  every 
nation  to  maintain  its  own  cults,  and  so  to  honour  the 
sovereign  by  showing  respect  to  his  representative. 
The  personality  of  the  various  gods  is  thus  more  or 
less  passed  over.  They  are,  in  fact,  gods  from  the 
point  of  view  of  religion,  abstractions  from  that  of 
philosophy.  And  a  judicious  use  of  the  allegorical 
method  of  interpretation  made  it  a  comparatively 

1  De  hid.  et  Osir.  67. 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  15 

simple  matter  to  reconcile  monotheism  in  theory  with 
polytheism  in  practice.  It  may  be  well  to  add  a  few 
words  with  regard  to  what  has  been  said  about  the 
attitude  of  the  philosophers,  and  in  particular,  of  the 
/^Neoplatonists,  towards  pagan  polytheism.  It  is  true 
that  the  philosopher,  strictly  speaking,  has  nothing  to 
do  with  systems  of  religion.  His  speculations  may 
take  a  theological  form,  and  he  may  even  lay  down 
general  principles  as  to  the  means  whereby  man  may 
hope  to  live  in  harmony  with  the  Deity :  but  with  the 
outward  forms  of  religion  he  has  no  connexion. 
Moreover,  in  considering  the  Neoplatonists  we  are 
tempted  to  imagine  that  the  whole  school  shared  the 
lofty  position  of  Plotinus,  and  to  forget  that,  until 
after  the  time  of  Julian,  no  other  Neoplatonic  writer 
confined  himself  to  the  discussion  of  abstract  philo- 
sophy, or  failed  to  make  it  clear  that  he  wished 
definitely  to  support  the  pagan  system.  How  far 
Plotinus  had  in  view  the  defence  of  paganism,  is  a 
question  which  will  be  discussed  later  :  at  all  events 
his  contemporaries  and  his  immediate  followers 
were  all  tinged  with  Neopythagoreanism,  and  hardly 
deserve,  in  its  highest  sense,  the  title  of  Philosophers. 
They  professed  to  be  rationalists  who  by  specious 
explanation  could  justify  the  existence  of  superstitious 
observances,  but  the  true  state  of  the  case  would  seem 
rather  to  be  that  they  were  carried  away  by  the  spirit 
of  the  age,  and  used  their  rationalism  to  condone 
their  own  superstition. 

The  great  defect  in  the  religious  revival  of  the 
third  century  was  its  utter  lack  of  the  spirit  of  criticism  \ 
1  Reville,  p.  130. 


l6  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

It  is  true  that  this  uncritical  spirit  was  not  limited  to 
that  particular  age,  nor  was  it  found  among  the 
heathen  alone.  Thus  Tacitus1  among  men  of  an 
earlier  generation,  and  Clement  of  Rome2  and 
Tertullian3  among  the  Christians,  were  as  ready  to 
accept  the  legend  of  the  Phoenix  as  Celsus4  or 
Philostratus5.  But  in  the  third  century  the  tide  of  ill- 
regulated  religious  feeling  produced  a  flood  of  super- 
stition against  which  men  of  the  keenest  intellect 
found  it  well  nigh  impossible  to  stand.  It  is  hard,  on 
any  other  supposition,  to  explain  how  so  many  of 
the  great  Neoplatonists  could  become  upholders  of 
astrology  and  magic,  and  declare  that  these  things 
had  a  scientific  basis  in  the  influence  of  the  stars  and 
the  mutual  relations  of  the  elements. 

The  whole  machinery  of  augury,  prophecy,  oracles 
and  the  like  was  once  again  called  into  play,  and  all 
classes  of  society  had  recourse  to  one  or  other  of 
these  sources  for  aid  and  information  upon  every 
conceivable  subject.  But  the  most  important  of  these 
means  of  communication  with  the  unseen  world  were 
the  various  "  Mysteries."  The  existence  of  such  rites 
was  not  a  new  thing.  The  Eleusinian  Mysteries  had 
already  been  long  established  in  the  days  of  Plato, 
and  the  mysteries  of  the  third  century  belong  to  the 
same  general  type.  The  number  of  deities  however 
in  whose  honour  they  were  celebrated,  the  high  value 
set  upon  initiation,  and  the  crowds  of  persons  who 
were  initiated,  often  into  the  mysteries  of  more  than 

1  Ann.  6.  28.  2  Ep.  i.  25. 

3  DeRes.  Cam.  13.  4  Or.  c.  Cels.  4.  98. 

5   Vit.  Apoll.  3.  49. 


I]  THE  THIRD   CENTURY  i; 

one  deity,  far  surpassed  anything  that  had  been  known 
before. 

There  is  in  fact  a  fundamental  difference  between 
the  early  Roman  conception  of  religion  and  that  of 
the  period  with  which  we  are  now  concerned1.  The 
old  Roman  religion  was  barren  and  cold.  The  stress 
was-  laid  on  formal  observances,  the  whole  matter 
being  neither  more  nor  less  than  a  bargain.  In  return 
for  the  proper  sacrifices  paid  at  the  proper  time  and 
in  the  proper  manner  the  gods  were  expected  to  send 
certain  advantages  to  the  worshipper.  But  by  the 
beginning  of  the  third  century  there  had  sprung  up  a 
real  love  for  the  gods,  and  a  desire  for  communion 
with  them.  The  belief  also  in  a  future  life  was  far 
more  definite  than  it  had  been  in  the  Classical  period. 
The  philosophers  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  hierophants 
of  the  various  mysteries  on  the  other,  endeavoured  to 
set  men's  minds  at  rest  upon  this  matter,  and  both 
alike  commanded  the  attention  of  those  whom  they 
addressed.  There  arose  moreover  an  idea  of  holiness 
which  had  been  practically  unknown  before2 ;  and 
with  it  an  idea  not  unlike  the  Christian  conception  of 
sin.  It  is  not  the  same,  for  there  is  no  notion  of 
man's  voluntary  deviation  from  the  will  of  God. 
But  there  is  the  longing  for  the  attainment  of  a  state 
of  purity,  whether  by  a  life  of  asceticism  or  by  a 
series  of  purifying  ceremonies. 

One  other  question  remains  to  be  discussed. 
What  was  the  attitude  of  the  paganism  of  this  period 
towards  Christianity?  Toleration  has  already  been 
mentioned  as  the  leading  characteristic  of  the  age, 

1  Reville,  p.  143.  2  Reville,  p.  152. 

E.  N.  2 


1 8  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

and  it  is  in  consequence  not  surprising  to  find  that, 
under  the  Syrian  Emperors,  the  Church  was  more  free 
from  persecution  than  at  any  other  time  between  the 
reigns  of  Nero  and  Constantine.  But  it  was  difficult 
to  extend  toleration  to  a  religion  that  was  itself 
intolerant;  and,  side  by  side  with  the  readiness  to 
abstain  from  persecution,  there  are  here  and  there 
traces  of  an  almost  pathetic  anxiety  that  the  Christians 
should  do  their  share,  and  acknowledge  that  the  older 
religions,  if  not  actually  superior,  were  at  least  on  the 
same  level  as  their  own,  and  worthy  of  the  fullest  re- 
cognition as  partial  manifestations  of  the  same  deity. 

The  attitude  however  of  the  Church  was  not 
conciliatory.  Never  perhaps  has  there  been  a  writer 
so  uncompromising  as  Tertullian,  and  even  if,  a 
generation  later,  Origen  appears  to  be  in  sympathy 
with  much  of  heathen  philosophy,  there  is  no  question 
as  to  his  position  with  regard  to  heathen  religion. 
Accordingly  attempts  were  made  to  weld  the  pagan 
systems  into  a  single  weapon,  which  could  be  used 
with  effect  against  the  new  religion. 

The  first  of  these  attempts  was  made  during  the 
supremacy  of  Julia  Domna1.  During  the  reigns  of 
her  husband,  Septimius  Severus,  and  of  his  successor 
Caracalla,  this  remarkable  woman  exercised  an 
influence  that  was  considerable  even  in  matters  of 
politics,  whilst  in  the  realm  of  art  and  literature  her 
power  was  unquestioned.  She  gathered  around  her 
a  literary  circle  of  the  best  intellects  of  the  age, 
recruited  from  all  parts  of  the  Empire,  but  principally 
from  Greece  and  her  native  Syria.  The  tone  of  her 

1  Reville,  p.  190. 


I]  THE   THIRD  CENTURY  19 

coterie  seems  to  have  been  brilliant  and  witty  rather 
than  scholarly ;  the  members  were  men  of  the  type 
that  feeds  on  the  love  of  the  marvellous,  but  they  were 
deficient  in  the  patience  needful  for  deep  thought,  and 
they  lacked  the  courage  fully  to  face  the  real  problems 
of  life.  Their  philosophy  was  Neopythagorean,  their 
religion  vague  and  comprehensive.  They  hated 
irreligion,  and  loved  variety,  and  they  were  moreover 
capable  of  professing  doctrines  of  high  purity  whilst 
leading  a  life  of  considerable  self-indulgence. 

Their  great  contribution  to  the  defence  of  pagan- 
ism was  the  life  of  Apollonius  of  Tyana,  which  was 
composed  at  the  suggestion  of  the  Empress,  written 
in  the  first  instance  by  Damis,  and  afterwards  re- 
written and  transformed  by  Philostratus.  The  subject 
of  this  biography  was  a  real  man,  who  lived  at  about 
the  date  to  which  he  is  here  assigned,  and  in  whose 
life  occurred  many  of  the  principal  episodes  here 
described.  But  the  whole  has  been  so  interwoven 
with  legend  and  fiction  that  it  is  well  nigh  impossible 
to  disentangle  the  true  from  the  false.  The  philo- 
sopher of  Tyana  is  in  fact  transformed  into  the  patron 
saint,  as  it  were,  of  third-century  paganism,  and  the 
picture  presented  to  us  does  not  so  much  represent 
what  Apollonius  actually  was,  as  what  Philostratus 
would  have  liked  him  to  be. 

On  the  precise  relation  between  the  work  of 
Philostratus  and  the  Christian  Gospels  something 
will  be  said  later:  for  the  present  it  is  sufficient  to 
observe  that  the  life  and  character  of  Apollonius,  as 
here  described,  so  far  expressed  the  ideals  of  the  age 
for  which  the  book  was  written,  that  from  being 
considered  a  mere  provincial  magician  or  charlatan, 

2—2 


20  ROMAN    RELIGION    IN  [l 

Apollonius  suddenly  came  to  be  revered  by  the  whole 
of  pagan  society  as  one  who  stood  on  a  level  with  the 
noblest  spirits  of  the  ancient  world.  Caracalla1  built 
a  temple  in  his.  honour  :  Alexander  Severus2  assigned 
him  a  niche  in  his  private  chapel,  side  by  side  with 
Orpheus  and  Alexander  the  Great;  and  later  still 
Eunapius3  revered  him  as  something  more  than  man. 
He  is  more  than  the  prophet  of  paganism  :  he  is  the 
incarnation  of  its  highest  hopes  and  aims. 

But,  as  time  went  on,  it  became  clear  that  the 
effort  had  failed.  The  composite  picture  of  Alexander 
constructed  by  the  sophists  of  the  third  century  was 
no  more  able  to  hold  its  own  against  the  Christ  of  the 
Gospels  than  the  disjointed  forces  of  paganism  to 
prevail  against  the  united  strength  of  the  organized 
Church,  and  the  heathen  revival  served  only  to  pave 
the  way  for  the  coming  of  the  new  religion  which  its 
promoters  were  endeavouring  to  check. 

Two  other  attempts  may  be  mentioned,  both  of 
which  illustrate  the  desire  for  recognition  from  the 
Christians  to  which  allusion  has  already  been  made. 
The  first  of  these  need  not  long  detain  us4:  it  was 
thoroughly  distasteful  to  many  of  the  people,  and  its 
chief  interest  lies  in  the  indication  which  it  gives  of 
the  trend  of  pagan  thought  towards  monotheism. 
The  Emperor  Elagabalus  was  taken  from  the  temple 
at  Emesa  to  be  placed  on  the  throne  against  his  will. 
He  evinced  no  care  whatever  for  the  concerns  of  the 
Empire  except  in  the  sphere  of  religion,  and  here  his 
sole  object  was  the  glorification  of  the  god  of  Emesa. 
He  endeavoured  to  make  the  worship  of  this  deity 

1  Dio  Cass.  77.  18.  2  Lamprid.  Alex.  Sev.  29. 

3  Eun.  Vit.  Phil.  Proem,  p.  3.     Boiss.  4  Reville,  p.  237.  • 


I]  THE   THIRD   CENTURY  21 

the  one  religion  of  the  Empire,  by  associating  with 
El-Gabal  the  symbols  and  functions  of  all  the  other 
gods,  and  he  expressed  a  hope  that  even  Jews  and 
Christians  might  be  persuaded  to  worship  the  supreme 
God  in  the  temple  of  El-Gabal.  But  his  avowed 
contempt  for  all  things  Roman  made  his  action  odious 
to  the  upper  classes :  it  never  really  affected  the  mass 
of  the  people,  and  its  effects  disappeared  immediately 
after  his  death. 

Elagabalus  was  succeeded  by  his  cousin  Alex- 
ander Severus,  a  man  of  very  different  type,  whose 
natural  temperament  and  education  alike  tended  to 
give  him  the  fullest  sympathy  with  the  old  Roman 
spirit.  He  enjoyed  intellectual  society  and  showed 
the  greatest  reverence  for  the  old  gods,  paying  weekly 
visits  to  the  temples  on  the  Capitol.  In  his  own 
private  chapel  he  worshipped  a  curious  assemblage  of 
famous  men.  The  niches  were  filled  with  statues  of 
Apollonius,  Christ,  Abraham,  Orpheus  and  Alexander 
the  Great1 ;  whilst  a  lower  order  of  heroes  was  also 
represented  which  included  the  names  of  Vergil 
and  Ciceroa.  Alexander  clearly  hoped  to  solve  the 
problem  of  paganism  by  a  religious  eclecticism ; 
calling  into  existence  a  hierarchy  of  the  saints  of  all 
the  religions  with  which  he  was  acquainted.  He  is 
perhaps  the  noblest  instance  of  the  wide  tolerance 
towards  which  the  comprehensive  religion  of  his  time 
tended,  but  there  was  a  certain  lack  of  cohesion  about 
his  schemes,  alike  in  religion  and  politics,  which  pre- 
vented them  from  exercising  any  lasting  influence. 

1  Lamprid.  Alex.  Sev.  29.  z  Ib.  31. 


CHAPTER   II 

EARLIER   SYSTEMS    OF   GREEK   PHILOSOPHY 

IT  will  be  well  in  the  present  chapter  to  describe 
the  general  state  of  philosophy  in  the  period  im- 
mediately preceding  the  rise  of  Neoplatonism,  and  to 
point  out  the  earlier  sources  from  which  many  of  the 
Neoplatonic  doctrines  were  derived.  In  order  to 
secure  these  two  objects  it  will  be  best,  first  to  give  a 
short  account  of  the  various  stages  of  Greek  philosophy 
with  which  we  are  here  concerned,  marking  the 
appearance  of  each  distinctive  point  of  teaching  as  it 
arises,  and  then  to  take  a  rapid  survey  of  the  general 
condition  of  philosophy  in  the  early  years  of  the 
third  century.  No  attempt  however  will  be  made  to 
give  an  exhaustive  catalogue  of  all  the  great  philo- 
sophers or  even  of  all  the  various  schools,  for  such  a 
list  would  seem  to  lie  outside  the  province  of  the 
present  essay. 

The  first  school  of  Greek  philosophy  occupied 
itself  with  speculations  upon  the  origin  and  constitu- 
tion of  the  physical  world.  This  primitive  Ionian 
school,  instituted  by  Thales  far  back  in  the  seventh 
century,  continued  to  exist  until  late  in  the  fifth 


OF 


II]      EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF   GREEK   PHILOSOPHY      23 

century  before  Christ.  The  majority  of  its  members 
need  not  detain  us.  Their  aim  was  to  discover  the 
material  out  of  which  the  physical  world  was 
fashioned,  a  material  which  the  earlier  members  of 
the  school  sought  in  a  single  primary  substance,  the 
later  ones  in  a  number  of  different  elements.  At  the 
same  time  there  may  here  and  there  be  traced  signs 
of  the  beginnings  of  something  more  than  merely 
physical  speculation.  Thus  Heraclitus  of  Ephesus,  in 
addition  to  his  famous  aphorism  on  the  universal 
prevalence  of  constant  change1,  also  propounded  some 
sort  of  teaching  on  the  subject  of  a  Logos*.  Heraclitus 
recognised  no  transcendent  deity,  so  that  his  Logos 
must  not  be  in  any  way  associated  with  the  Jewish 
conception  of  the  "  Word  of  God3."  It  is  eternal  and 
self-subsisting,  and  seems  to  represent  the  "  rational 
self-evolution  of  the  world,"  the  law  of  progress  by 
means  of  constant  strife4.  The  name  \6<yo<?  was 
apparently  selected,  as  being  less  encumbered  with 
human  and  material  associations  than  either  1/01)9  or 


We  seem  here  to  have  the  first  beginning  of  the 
conception  of  an  universal  Reason  which  occupies  so 
prominent  a  position  in  later  philosophy.  There  is 
not  sufficient  evidence  to  make  clear  the  details  of 
Heraclitus'  teaching : — whether  for  instance  the  Logos 
was  possessed  of  consciousness,  and  again  whether  it 
was  identical  with  the  fire  which  Heraclitus  declared 
to  be  the  primary  substance.  It  is  perhaps  most 

1  Heracl. /nz£-.  41  ;  Ritter  and  Preller,  p.  27. 

2  Frag.  2 ;  R.  P.  p.  26. 

3  Cf.  Drummond,  Philo  Judaeus  I.  pp.  34,  46. 

4  Heracl.  frag.  46;  R.  P.  p.  27.  5  Drummond  I.  p.  47. 


24  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

probable  that  the  system  of  Heraclitus  was  a  refined 
form  of  pantheism1,  and  that  his  Logos  was  not 
possessed  of  the  consciousness  which  Plotinus  claimed 
for  his  Mind  (z/oOs);  but  it  is  impossible  to  speak  with 
certainty. 

Heraclitus  is  said  to  have  flourished  about  the 
year  500  B.C.,  and  the  same  date  is  assigned  to  the 
birth  of  the  only  other  member  of  the  Ionian  school 
to  whom  it  is  necessary  to  refer.  This  was  Anaxagoras 
of  Clazomenae,  whose  doctrine  of  the  universal  Mind 
(vov?)  so  completely  overshadowed  the  speculations 
of  Heraclitus  upon  the  Logos,  that  this  use  of  the 
term  Logos  almost  disappeared  from  Greek  philo- 
sophy, until  it  was  revived  five  centuries  later  by 
Philo. 

This  universal  Mind  of  Anaxagoras,  whether 
strictly  immaterial  or  composed  of  the  subtlest  form 
of  matter,  is  clearly  distinguished  from  the  rest  of  the 
universe.  It  is  conceived  as  infinite  and  self-subsisting, 
free  alike  from  external  mixture  and  external  control2. 
It  possesses  universal  knowledge  and  pervades  and 
governs  all  things  that  have  soul.  In  the  original 
foundation  of  the  world  it  plays  a  smaller  part  than 
might  have  been  expected,  appearing  only  as  giving 
rise  to  the  first  revolution  which  produced  the  com- 
bination of  objects  as  they  are  now  known  to  us ;  but, 
in  the  organic  world,  it  is  the  vital  principle,  in  which 
plants  as  well  as  animals  have  a  share. 

The  sixth  century  before  Christ  witnessed  the  rise 
of  two  other  schools  of  Greek  philosophy,  both  of 

1  Cf.  Drummond  I.  p.  44. 

2  Anax.  apud  Simplic.  Phys.  156.  13;  R.  P.  p.  117. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  25 

which  left  their  mark  upon  the  system  with  which  we 
are  concerned.  The  first  of  these  schools  was  founded 
by  Pythagoras1,  who  laid  stress  upon  the  influence  of 
Number,  and  who  was  perhaps  the  earliest  Greek 
exponent  of  the  doctrine  of  transmigration  of  souls. 
The  mystical  form  of  his  teaching  had  a  great 
attraction  for  the  philosophers  who  immediately 
precede  the  rise  of  the  Neoplatonists  and  although 
there  are  few  traces  of  his  influence  in  the  writings 
of  Plotinus,  yet  the  lives  of  Pythagoras  composed  by 
Porphyry  and  lamblichus,  and  the  abundant  references 
to  him  in  their  other  writings,  are  sufficient  evidence 
of  the  esteem  in  which  he  was  held  by  the  later 
Neoplatonists. 

The  other  school  of  pre-Socratic  philosophy  to 
which  reference  has  been  made  is  that  of  the  Eleatics. 
Its  principal  members  were  Xenophanes,  Parmenides, 
Zeno,  and  Melissus ;  and  their  chief  contribution  to 
philosophy  consisted  in  speculations  upon  the  nature 
of  Being.  They  were  impressed  with  the  inability  of 
the  human  mind  adequately  to  grasp  the  true  nature 
of  the  deity.  The  protest  of  Xenophanes  against 
anthropomorphic  conceptions2  of  the  gods  need  not 
detain  us,  but  a  few  words  may  be  said  with  regard  to 
the  positive  teaching  of  the  school.  In  their  view  the 
essence  of  Being  consists  in  unity  and  immutability, 
and  its  attributes  are  described  by  a  series  of  para- 
doxes. It  is  at  once  neither  finite  nor  infinite,  neither 
movable  nor  immovable ;  it  had  no  beginning  and  it 
will  have  no  end3.  In  addition  to  this  doctrine  of 

1  Cf.  Ueberweg,  pp.  42 — 49.  2  Xenophanes,  frag.  6;  R.  P.  p.  79. 

3  De  Melisso,  977  b;  R.  P.  p.  85. 


26  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

Being,  the  Eleatics  also  asserted  what  may  perhaps 
best  be  called  the  positive  non-existence  of  Non- 
Being1,  the  dark  principle  which  lies  at  the  root  of  all 
the  changing  phenomena  of  the  world  in  which  we 
live. 

There  are  but  few  direct  references  to  the  Eleatic 
school  in  the  writings  of  the  Neoplatonists,  though 
Plotinus  twice  mentions  Parmenides  with  respect2, 
but  the  indirect  influence  which  they  exerted  was 
very  considerable.  If  it  is  in  the  writings  of  Heraclitus 
and  Anaxagoras  that  we  have  to  look  for  the  first 
speculations  upon  Mind,  it  is  in  those  of  the  Eleatics 
that  we  find  the  germ  of  Plotinus'  teaching  about 
"The  Good." 

The  next  name  that  arrests  our  attention  is  that 
of  Socrates.  Of  the  vast  influence  exercised  by  this 
philosopher  over  the  whole  of  subsequent  Greek 
thought  there  can  be  no  doubt,  but  it  was  an  influence 
due  rather  to  the  methods  which  he  employed  than 
to  the  actual  details  of  his  teaching.  Like  Ammonius 
Saccas  the  founder  of  the  Neoplatonic  school,  Socrates 
was  not  a  writer ;  and  it  is  moreover  necessary  to 
distinguish  his  authentic  teaching  from  that  which  is 
merely  put  in  his  mouth  by  Plato.  In  Xenophon's 
Memorabilia  however  we  are  fortunate  enough  to 
possess  materials  which  are  free  from  Platonic 
influence,  and  from  a  comparison  of  the  two  portraits 
the  following  particulars  may  be  gleaned.  Socrates 
appears  to  have  been  the  first  thinker  to  introduce  the 
doctrine  of  a  divine  purpose  in  creation3.  The  world 

3  Cf.  Plat.  Soph.  237 a;  R.  P.  p.  90. 

2  Plot.  Enn.  5.  i.  8,  6.  6.  18.  3  Drummond  I.  p.  52  ff. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  2/ 

has  been  designed  by  the  gods  for  the  use  of  man,  to 
whose  needs  many  ordinances  are  clearly  subservient1. 
Thus  man  derives  advantage  from  the  alternation  of 
day  and  night,  from  the  existence  of  the  lower 
animals  and  of  fire ;  whilst  the  gods'  special  care  for 
him  is  manifest  in  the  gifts  of  human  intellect  and 
ingenuity,  as  well  as  in  the  provision  of  oracles  for 
his  guidance.  The  precise  relation  between  the  divine 
and  the  human  is  less  clearly  expressed.  The  human 
soul  is  said  to  partake  of  the  divine  nature,  as  the 
body  partakes  of  the  physical  elements2.  But  Socrates 
is  here  involved  in  the  difficulty  which  Anaxagoras 
had  felt  before  him3.  He  regards  the  deity  as 
personal — believing  perhaps  in  one  supreme  God  with 
a  number  of  inferior  and  local  deities  beneath  him — 
and  at  the  same  time  he  holds  that  man's  soul  is  a 
part  of  God.  To  this  problem  he  has  no  satisfactory 
answer  to  give ;  but  the  perception  of  the  difficulty  is 
the  first  step  towards  its  solution,  and  the  participation 
of  man  in  the  divine  nature  explains  and  justifies  his 
endeavour  to  know  God. 

From  Socrates  we  pass  on  to  his  great  disciple 
whose  philosophy  Plotinus  and  his  school  professed 
to  revive  and  develope.  The  great  addition  made  by 
Plato  to  Greek  speculation  was  his  doctrine  of  Ideas. 
These  are  to  us  only  abstract  notions,  and  yet  they 
are  eternal  realities.  They  are,  as  it  were,  the  Genii 
of  the  various  general  notions,  exempt  from  all  space 
limitations,  but  capable  of  motion,  possessed  of  life 
and  intelligence,  belonging  to  a  world  of  real  being4. 

1  Xen.  Mem.  4.  3.  3 — 10.  2  Ib.  4.  3.  14. 

3  Drummond  I.  p.  56.  4  Plato,  Soph.  248  E;  R.  P.  p.  243. 


28  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

The  Ideas  are  not  all  on  the  same  level :  there  are 
various  ranks  to  be  distinguished  among  them,  and 
the  highest  of  all  is  the  Idea  of  "  The  Good1." 

The  universe  in  which  we  live  falls  short  of  the 
perfection  of  the  world  of  Ideas.  It  has  been  created 
by  the  good  God  in  order  to  express  his  goodness ; 
but  fashioned  as  it  is  out  of  indeterminate  matter  (TO 
a.7reipov\  it  does  not  entirely  or  adequately  fulfil  that 
purpose.  There  cannot  however  be  more  than  one 
such  universe,  for  this  one,  despite  its  imperfections, 
is  the  best  that  can  be  made.  It  is  pervaded  by  a 
Soul  and  is,  in  fact,  a  rational  being2. 

Now  the  creator  is  incapable  of  making  anything 
that  is  imperfect.  He  therefore  creates  the  lesser 
deities  and  points  out  to  them  the  need  of  mortal 
creatures3.  They  then  proceed  to  create  the  bodies, 
whilst  he  creates  the  souls,  one  for  each  star,  ready 
to  be  assigned  to  mortal  bodies  as  need  arises.  The 
soul  therefore  is  divine  in  origin  and  in  nature :  it 
exists  before  the  body  as  well  as  after  it.  Like  the 
soul  of  the  universe,  the  soul  of  the  individual  forms 
a  link  between  the  world  of  phenomena  and  the 
Ideas,  and  even  while  in  the  body  it  has  from  time  to 
time  flashes  of  recollection  of  its  former  life  in  the 
higher  sphere.  In  the  tenth  book  of  the  Republic* 
there  is  to  be  found  a  doctrine  of  transmigration  of 
souls ;  but  it  is  not  clear  how  far  this  is  to  be  taken 
seriously,  and  how  far  it  is  only  a  picturesque  addition 
to  the  myth  in  which  it  occurs. 

1  Plato,  Rep.  vi.  5080;  R.  P.  p.  251. 

2  Plato,  Tim.  290;  R.  P.  p.  257. 

3  Plato,  Tim.  410.     Drummond  i.  p.  66.         4  Rep.  x.  617  E. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  29 

The  schools  which  professed  to  be  the  guardians 
of  Plato's  philosophy,  and  which  are  known  as  the 
Old,  Middle,  and  New  Academy,  need  not  detain  us1. 
They  do  not  in  any  real  sense  bridge  the  gulf  between 
Plato  and  Plotinus,  nor  are  there  many  references 
to  them  in  the  writings  of  the  Neoplatonists.  Their 
doctrines  are  often  directly  opposed  to  those  of  the 
Neoplatonists,  or  deal  with  entirely  different  subjects. 
Thus  in  the  Old  Academy  Speusippus2  taught  that 
"  The  Best,"  although  the  first  in  rank,  is  the  last  of 
the  Ideas  in  order  of  development,  a  doctrine  which 
Plotinus  would  never  have  accepted ;  whilst  Heraclides 
devoted  himself  to  astronomy.  Xenocrates3  is  said 
to  have  connected  the  Ideas  with  numbers,  thereby 
showing  a  tendency  towards  Pythagoreanism  such  as  is 
also  noticeable  in  the  Neoplatonist  lamblichus.  The 
Middle  Academy,  alike  in  its  early  period  under 
Arcesilas  and  in  its  later  one  under  Carneades,  was 
almost  entirely  sceptical  in  its  views ;  but  in  the  New 
Academy  there  was  a  return  to  more  dogmatic 
teaching,  and  Antiochus  of  Ascalon  made  an  attempt 
to  combine  the  teaching  of  Plato  with  certain 
Aristotelian  and  Stoic  doctrines,  which  resembles  the 
eclectic  syncretism  of  the  Neoplatonists4. 

Of  the  vast  system  of  Aristotle  it  is  impossible 
here  to  give  a  detailed  account5.  His  work  was 
essentially  that  of  a  systematizer.  He  took  the  great 
principles  of  Plato  and  endeavoured  to  show  how 

1  See  Uebenveg,  pp.  133 — 136. 

2  Arist.  Met.  xn.  7;  R.  P.  p.  280. 

3  Stobaeus,  EcL  i.  62;  R.  P.  p.  282. 

4  Sext.  Pyrrh.  i.  235;  R.  P.  p.  447. 

5  Cf.  Crozier,  vol.  i.  p.  54  ff. 


30  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

they  could  be  made  to  explain  the  phenomena  of  the 
world  around  us.  In  order  to  do  this  it  was  necessary 
to  define  clearly  the  mutual  relations  of  the  Platonic 
elements,  which  Aristotle  accordingly  considered  in 
two  groups.  In  the  first  group  he  placed  "The  Good," 
together  with  the  Ideas,  which  he  regarded  as  being 
contained  within  the  mind  of  The  Good,  and  not,  as 
Plato  had  held,  as  having  an  independent  existence. 
In  the  second  group  he  placed  indeterminate  matter 
(TO  aTreipov),  and  with  it  the  same  Ideas  as  have  been 
already  mentioned  in  the  first  group.  The  next  step 
was  to  find  the  means  whereby  the  lifeless  mixture  of 
Ideas  and  Matter  should  become  instinct  with  life, 
and  this  he  found  in  Motion,  derived  from  the  Ether 
that  fills  the  vault  of  heaven,  whose  revolutions  enable 
the  Ideas  to  unite  with  the  formless  matter,  and 
thereby  cause  the  world  to  come  into  being1. 

The  position  of  matter  in  the  system  of  Aristotle 
is  thus  different  from  that  which  it  occupies  in  the 
writings  of  Plato.  It  is  no  longer  a  purely  negative 
principle,  but  capable  of  direct  union  with  the  Ideas. 
In  this  particular  case,  Plotinus  was  led  by  the 
Oriental  tendencies  of  his  age  to  follow  Plato,  and 
indeed  to  go  beyond  Plato  in  his  abhorrence  of  things 
material,  but  in  other  respects  the  teaching  of 
Aristotle  had  a  very  real  bearing  upon  the  Neoplatonic 
system.  The  incident  mentioned  by  Porphyry2  of 
Plotinus'  bidding  Amelius  to  reply  to  Porphyry's 
pamphlet  on  the  theme  "  That  things  intelligible  have 
their  subsistence  outside  Intelligence"  shows  that  in 

1  Arist.  Z><?  Caelo  I.  3.  270 A;  R.  P.  p.  329. 

2  Vit.  Plot.  18. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  31 

this  instance,  where  Porphyry,  and  in  all  probability 
his  teacher  Longinus,  followed  Plato,  Plotinus  had 
adopted  an  Aristotelian  attitude :  and,  in  the  writings 
of  the  later  Neoplatonists,  commentaries  upon  the 
works  of  Aristotle  and  treatises  upon  his  relation  to 
Plato  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 

The  tendency  of  Greek  philosophy  after  the  time 
of  Aristotle  was  to  become  practical  rather  than 
speculative.  The  subjects  with  which  the  Stoics  and 
Epicureans  occupied  themselves  were  the  relations  of 
philosophy  to  religion,  and  above  all  the  quest  of  that 
indifference  to  things  external  which  alone  could  arm 
the  individual  with  calmness  and  fortitude  under  all 
circumstances.  The  Epicureans  we  may  pass  over. 
Beyond  accepting  in  its  entirety  the  atomic  theory  of 
Democritus,  they  made  no  attempt  to  discover  the 
final  cause  of  the  creation  and  government  of  the 
world  ;  and  they  exercised  no  influence  on  the  later 
systems  with  which  we  are  concerned.  Even  the 
traces  of  speculation  that  still  remained  among  the 
Stoics  showed  that  the  current  of  men's  thought  had 
taken  a  new  direction.  Their  conceptions  of  the 
ultimate  principles  had  become  materialised.  The 
universe  was  regarded  as  a  living  being,  endowed 
with  the  highest  reason1,  and  the  existence  of  an 
ideal  world  beyond  it  was  no  longer  held. 

The  importance  of  the  Stoics  in  the  history  of 
philosophy  is  considerable.  When  Greek  philosophy 
was  transplanted  to  Rome,  it  was  Stoicism  that  found 
the  new  soil  most  congenial,  as  the  long  list  of  famous 
Stoics  during  the  first  two  centuries  of  the  Empire 

1  Diog.  vii.  139;  R.  P.  p.  406. 


32  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

bears  witness.  But  the  Neoplatonic  revival  in  the 
third  century  was,  in  reality  as  well  as  in  name,  a 
reaction  to  the  earlier  system  of  Plato,  and  owed 
little  or  nothing  to  Stoic  speculation.  Indirectly 
however  the  severe  Stoic  teaching  upon  morality 
paved  the  way  for  the  lofty  mysticism  of  Plotinus, 
and  it  is  of  interest  to  note  that  the  Stoics  were  the 
first  school  to  develope  the  system  of  allegorical 
interpretation.  Mystical  interpretations  of  special 
points  had  already  been  given  by  Demo'critus  and  by 
Metrodorus  of  Lampsacus1,  as  well  as  by  some  of 
the  Cynics ;  but  the  method  had  not  before  been 
systematically  applied  to  the  whole  field  of  popular 
superstition. 

Under  the  Roman  Empire  Stoicism  continued  to 
be  the  dominant  philosophical  system  until  the  latter 
half  of  the  second  century  of  the  Christian  era.  But 
before  discussing  the  schools  that  took  its  place,  we 
must  turn  back  for  a  moment,  to  trace  the  rise  of  a 
new  stream  of  speculation,  which  had  begun  to 
exercise  a  considerable  influence  upon  the  general 
current  of  men's  thought.  We  cannot  here  enter 
fully  into  the  origin  either  of  the  Jewish  colony  at 
Alexandria,  or  of  the  philosophical  school  which  it 
produced.  Suffice  it  to  say  that  the  Alexandrian 
Jews  entered  readily  into  the  intellectual  life  of  the 
place :  they  welcomed  Greek  philosophy  as  a  further 
revelation  in  the  light  of  which  the  records  of  the  Old 
Testament  received  a  new  meaning.  In  particular 
the  personifications  of  the  Word  and  Wisdom  of  God, 
which  had  been  described  with  gradually  increasing 

1  Drummond  I.  p.  121. 


II]  GREEK    PHILOSOPHY  33 

clearness  by  the  writers  of  some  of  the  later  books  of 
the  Old  Testament,  now  found  a  counterpart  in  the 
conceptions  of  Plato  and  the  other  Greek  philosophers. 
These  conceptions  the  Jewish  writers  developed  in  the 
light  of  the  strong  and  pure  monotheism  of  their  own 
religion,  and  thus  gave  rise  to  the  Jewish- Alexandrian 
school  of  philosophy.  The  most  distinguished  re- 
presentative of  this  school  was  Philo,  whose  period  of 
literary  activity  seems  to  have  closed  about  the  year 
40  A.D.  He  can  hardly  be  called  a  great  or  original 
thinker :  his  system  lacks  cohesion  and  is  often  self- 
contradictory  :  but  he  is  a  writer  of  real  importance, 
since  he  marks  the  first  beginnings  of  a  return  from 
Stoic  and  Aristotelian  teaching  towards  Platonic 
philosophy.  It  is  however  correct  to  say  that  "Philo 
inaugurated  Neoplatonism1."  Nearly  two  centuries 
had  yet  to  elapse  before  Plotinus  took  up  the  study 
of  philosophy,  and  it  is  difficult  to  find,  between 
Philo  and  Ammonius  Saccas,  a  series  of  philosophers 
sufficiently  connected  to  deserve  the  name  of  a  school. 
He  was  rather  a  fore-runner,  the  effects  of  whose  work 
were  not  immediately  visible,  though  destined  in  after 
years  to  be  of  the  greatest  importance. 

The  teaching  of  Philo  is  mainly  given  in  the  form 
of  comments  upon  various  texts  out  of  the  Old 
Testament.  To  this  peculiarity  of  form  may  in  part 
be  ascribed  the  inconsistencies  and  general  lack  of 
cohesion  to  which  allusion  has  already  been  made. 
By  adopting  it,  Philo  deprives  himself  of  the  oppor- 
tunity for  giving  a  single  exposition  of  his  whole 
system,  and  he  is  moreover  led  into  the  habit  of 

1  Crozier,  vol.  I.  p.  70  and  p.  450. 

E.  N.  3 


34  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

expounding  each  verse  to  the  best  of  his  ability, 
regardless  of  what  he  may  have  said  on  the  same 
subject  in  connexion  with  another  passage. 

A  few  words  may  be  added  on  the  points  at 
which  the  teaching  of  Philo  approximates  most 
closely  to  that  of  the  Neoplatonists.  Foremost 
among  these  stand  his  conceptions  of  God,  the  Logos, 
and  the  Powers.  Philo  is  never  tired  of  asserting  the 
existence  and  the  unity  of  God,  in  opposition  to  the 
views  of  atheists  and  polytheists  alike.  God  however 
is  incomprehensible1.  He  is  one,  He  is  simple,  He  is 
unchangeable,  and  He  is  eternal ;  but  beyond  these 
somewhat  negative  attributes,  man  is  unable  to 
describe  Him,  and  even  the  patriarchs  were  ignorant 
of  His  Name.  The  similarity  of  this  doctrine  to 
Plotinus'  conception  of  The  One  is  obvious.  It  would 
seem  that  Philo  derived  it,  not  from  Plato  nor  yet 
entirely  from  the  Old  Testament,  but  rather  from  the 
Old  Testament  read  in  the  spirit  of  Plato. 

The  mediator  between  God  and  Man  is  the 
Logos2.  The  titles  under  which  He  is  mentioned 
indicate  the  high  position  which  He  held  in  Philo's 
system.  He  is  called  the  First-born  Son  of  God3,  the 
Eldest  Angel,  the  Archangel,  the  Name  or  the  Image 
of  God,  and  again,  Man  in  the  Image  of  God.  At 
the  same  time  it  is  not  easy  to  determine  the  precise 
conception  that  Philo  wishes  to  convey.  The  Logos 
is  described  in  one  passage  as  at  once  the  source  and 
the  sum  of  the  Powers  ;  elsewhere  as  the  intelligible 

1  Herriot,  Philon  lejuif,  pp.  206  ff. 

2  Herriot,  pp.  237  ff. 

3  Philo,  De  Conf.  Ling.  28.  p.  427  Mang. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  35 

world1,  the  sum  of  the  Angels  or  of  the  Ideas  and 
again  as  the  divine  spirit.  At  one  time  He  seems 
to  have  a  distinct  personality,  at  another,  merely  to 
express  the  relation  in  which  God  stands  to  the  world. 
The  fact  is  that  Philo  deals  throughout  in  metaphors 
rather  than  definitions.  He  has  not  formed,  in  his 
own  mind,  a  perfectly  distinct  conception  of  the 
Logos,  and  the  description  which  he  gives  is  somewhat 
confused  in  consequence. 

The  same  criticism  may  be  passed  upon  Philo's 
account  of  the  Powers2.  At  one  time  he  seems  to 
regard  them  as  personified  attributes  of  the  Supreme 
Being,  whether  in  His  aspect  of  Creator,  when  we 
speak  of  Him  as  God,  or  of  Ruler,  when  we  call  Him 
Lord.  At  another  time  he  approaches  very  closely  to 
the  Platonic  conception  of  the  Ideas,  on  the  model  of 
which  the  world  around  us  was  created,  whilst  in  a 
third  group  of  passages  he  identifies  the  Powers  with 
the  Angels.  It  may  be  noticed  that  Philo  seems  here 
to  hover  between  Platonic  and  Aristotelian  teaching, 
and  that  he  anticipates  the  position  adopted  by 
Plotinus.  He  follows  Plato  in  assigning  an  actual 
existence  to  the  Ideas,  and  in  speaking  of  the 
intelligible  world :  but,  like  Plotinus,  he  also  adopts  a 
definitely  Aristotelian  position  when  he  places  the 
Ideas  within  the  Logos. 

With  regard  to  cosmology,  Philo  accepts  the 
teaching  of  Plato3.  He  explicitly  rejects  both  the 
Aristotelian  view  that  this  world  had  no  beginning 

1  Philo,  De  Opif.  Mundi,  6.  p.  5  Mang. 

2  Herriot,  pp.  241  ff. 

3  Herriot,  pp.  ssoff. ;  cf.  De  Incorrupt.  Mundi,  3. 

3—2 


36  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

and  will  have  no  end,  and  that  of  the  Stoics,  who 
believed  that  the  present  order  of  things  would  one 
day  be  destroyed  by  fire.  He  maintains  that  the 
world  was  created,  and  thus  had  a  beginning,  but  that, 
once  created,  it  is  eternal.  He  adds  moreover1,  like 
Plato,  and  for  the  reasons  which  Plato  adduces,  that 
there  can  be  no  other  physical  world  than  that  in 
which  we  live.  It  is  in  the  highest  degree  improbable 
that  God  would  create  a  world  inferior  or  even  similar 
to  this  one,  and  it  is  equally  clear  that  if  He  had  been 
able  to  create  a  better,  He  would  already  have  done  so. 
One  other  point  in  Philo's  teaching  demands  a 
word  in  passing2.  He  distinguishes  four  classes  of 
''ecstasy."  The  first  is  ordinary  madness.  The  second 
consists  of  sudden  astonishment  such  as  that  with 
which  Isaac  was  filled  when  Esau  claimed  his  blessing. 
The  third  class  he  describes  as  the  calm  state  of  the 
reason  which  resembles  the  deep  sleep  which  fell 
upon  Adam  :  whilst  to  the  fourth  class  belongs  the 
inspiration  of  the  prophets,  which  Philo  himself 
professes  to  have  at  times  experienced.  It  is  to  be 
remarked  that  the  "ecstasy"  of'  Plotinus  is  not 
identical  with  the  fourth  or  highest  class,  but  is  more 
nearly  akin  to  the  third  in  Philo's  series.  This 
example  illustrates  the  characteristic  difference  that 
runs  through  the  whole  systems  of  Plotinus  and 
Philo,  for  the  latter  never  permits  himself  to  be  so  far 
carried  away  by  his  philosophy  as  to  forget  that  he  is 
a  Jew,  or  to  enunciate  doctrines  inconsistent  with  his 
interpretation  of  the  Old  Testament  scriptures. 

1  Herriot,  p.  234. 

2  Herriot,  p.  194;  Quis  rer.  div.  heres  sit.  51.  52.  p.  509  Mang. 


II]  GREEK   PHILOSOPHY  37 

It  should  be  added  that  Philo  is  not  entirely  free 
from  the  Pythagoreanism  which  contributes  so  large 
a  share  to  the  philosophy  of  the  first  four  centuries 
after  Christ1.  To  the  modern  reader,  his  mystical 
speculations  on  the  subject  of  number  appear  to  be 
meaningless  and  fantastic,  but  they  are  thoroughly 
characteristic  of  the  age  in  which  they  are  written. 
Numerical  mysticism  does  not  play  a  prominent  part 
in  the  philosophy  of  Plato,  although  instances  of  it 
are  to  be  found,  but  out  of  those  who  endeavoured  in 
after  years  to  revive  his  teaching,  there  were  few  who 
succeeded  in  resisting  the  attraction  which  speculation 
of  this  kind  seems  to  have  exercised. 

Another  "fore-runner,"  who  still  hardly  deserves 
the  title  of  Neoplatonist,  was  Plutarch  of  Chaeronea. 
He  too  was  opposed  to  Stoic  doctrines  and  drew  his 
inspiration  from  the  writings  of  Plato.  He  held  that 
there  are  two  first  principles2,  God  and  Matter,  the 
giver  and  the  receiver  of  form  respectively,  and 
between  them,  the  Ideas,  or  patterns  according  to 
which  the  world  was  made.  For  Matter,  though  not 
in  itself  good,  is  indifferent,  and  is  evil  only  in  so  far 
as  it  is  permeated  by  the  evil  principle  which  is  the 
cause  of  all  disorder,  and  to  which  Plutarch  gives  the 
title  of  the  World-soul3.  The  system  of  Plutarch  is 
less  elaborate  and  less  thorough  than  that  of  Plotinus, 
though  in  some  respects  he  directly  anticipates  the 
doctrines  of  the  Neoplatonists.  He  definitely  main- 
tains, for  example,  the  existence  of  both  gods  and 
daemons4,  and  in  his  explanation  of  the  "  daemon  "  of 

1  Herriot,  pp.  261  ff.          2  De  Is.  et  Osir.  45.  p.  369;  R.  P.  p.  508. 
3  De  An.  Procr.  5.  p.  1014.  4  R.  P.  p.  510. 


38  EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF  [ll 

Socrates,  he  clearly  takes  up  the  position  afterwards, 
adopted  by  Plotinus,  that  the  true  philosopher  should 
base  his  teaching  not  upon  logical  deduction  but  on 
direct  intuition1. 

It  only  remains  to  enumerate  the  chief  philosophers 
who  occur  in  the  century  immediately  preceding  the 
appearance  of  Ammonius  Saccas.  After  the  time  of 
Marcus  Aurelius,  the  popularity  of  Stoicism  declined, 
and  Neopythagoreanism  became  the  most  fashionable 
form  of  philosophy.  It  was  characterized  by  a  love 
of  numerical  speculation  and  a  somewhat  vague 
mysticism,  based  on  the  study  of  writings,  authentic 
or  spurious,  attributed  to  Pythagoras  and  his  school. 
The  most  illustrious  name  in  this  period  is  that  of 
Numenius  of  Apamea,  whose  famous  description  of 
Plato  as  the  Attic  Moses2  illustrates  at  once  his 
ignorance  of  the  true  character  of  Plato  and  Moses 
alike,  and  his  desire  to  illustrate  the  affinity  that 
exists  between  all  seekers  after  truth,  to  whatever 
nationality  or  religion  they  may  belong.  It  is  how- 
ever more  important  for  our  present  purpose  to  notice 
that  Numenius  distinguished  three  gods — the  first 
subsisting  in  undisturbed  self-contemplation,  the 
second  and  third  being  the  creator  and  the  creation 
respectively.  He  also  recognised  a  twofold  division 
of  the  human  soul,  into  rational  and  irrational 
elements.  Of  these,  the  former  contemplates  the 
deity,  whilst  the  latter  renders  the  soul  capable  of 
union  with  a  material  body. 

The  second  century  also  witnessed  the  rise  of  a 

1  Cf.  Maurice,  Moral  and  Metaphysical  Philosophy,  p.  284. 

2  Suidas;  R.  P.  p.  512;  Euseb.  Praep.  Ev.  9.  6,  u.  10. 


II]  GREEK    PHILOSOPHY  39 

school  of  sceptics,  of  whom  Sextus  Empiricus  was 
the  most  considerable ;  and  mention  must  also  be 
made  of  Celsus1,  the  great  antagonist  of  Origen.  The 
Sceptics  however  need  not  detain  us,  and  though 
Celsus  is  said  to  have  been  a  Platonist,  the  extant 
fragments  of  his  work  contain  but  little  constructive 
philosophy. 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  say  more  about  the 
general  condition  of  the  world  of  thought  at  the 
beginning  of  the  third  century.  There  was  no 
teacher  of  commanding  genius,  and  no  school  that 
could  lay  claim  to  any  degree  of  originality  or  creative 
power.  We  find  on  all  sides  an  appeal  to  antiquity, 
which  meets  us  in  the  realms  of  religion  and  philo- 
sophy alike,  and  contributes  to  the  popularity  both  of 
Egyptian  worship  and  of  Pythagorean  teaching.  But 
the  appeal  was  shallow  and  uncritical,  and  the  results 
were  correspondingly  barren.  Authority  took  the 
place  of  argument,  and  progress  was  held  to  consist 
in  tedious  elaboration  of  detail.  Orientalism  too 
exercised  a  strange  fascination  over  men's  minds. 
Philostratus  described  how  Apollonius  of  Tyana  had 
journeyed  to  India,  to  converse  with  the  Brahmins 
and  other  wise  men  of  the  East,  and  it  is  probable 
that  there  were  others,  besides  Plotinus,  who  en- 
deavoured to  follow  his  example.  Above  all,  the 
spirit  of  syncretism,  whose  influence  in  matters  of 
religion  has  already  been  mentioned,  was  no  less 
powerful  in  the  region  of  philosophy.  The  aim  of 
the  philosophers  was  to  unite  the  teachings  of  all  the 

1  Cf.  Ueberweg,  p.  -237. 


40      EARLIER   SYSTEMS   OF   GREEK   PHILOSOPHY      [ll 

great  masters  of  old ;  to  reconcile  Plato  with  Stoicism, 
Aristotle  with  Pythagoreanism  and  by  a  judicious 
combination  of  these  diverse  elements,  to  arrive  at  a 
system  which  should  represent,  not  the  teaching  of 
this  or  that  school,  but  the  accumulated  wisdom  of 
the  human  race. 


CHAPTER    III 

THE   FIRST   BEGINNINGS    OF   CHRISTIAN 
PHILOSOPHY 

IN  the  chapter  just  concluded  it  will  perhaps 
have  been  noticed  that  there  is  no  mention  of  Chris- 
tian philosophy.  There  are  the  names  of  Greek 
philosophers  in  abundance  :  something  too  will  be 
found  about  the  Roman  and  Jewish  schools,  but  of 
Christian  philosophy  as  such,  nothing  has  been  said. 
Hence  it  will  be  well,  before  proceeding  to  discuss 
the  system  of  Plotinus  and  the  history  of  his  school, 
to  consider  briefly  what  had  been  the  relations 
between  Christianity  and  philosophy  during  the  first 
two  centuries  of  our  era,  and  what  was  the  state  of 
things  existing  at  the  beginning  of  the  period  with 
which  we  are  concerned. 

Now  in  the  first  place,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that 
Christian  teaching,  as  set  forth  in  the  New  Testament, 
appealed,  and  was  intended  to  appeal,  not  merely 
to  the  poor  and  ignorant  but  to  men  of  an  intellec- 
tual and  literary  bent.  St  Paul,  when  preaching  at 
Athens,  did  not  hesitate  to  address  himself  to  the 
philosophers,  who  in  their  turn,  until  he  excited  their 
derision  by  speaking  of  our  Lord's  Resurrection,  were 


42  THE   FIRST   BEGINNINGS   OF  [ill 

ready  enough  to  give  him  a  hearing.  Nor  is  this 
an  isolated  case.  Alike  in  the  writings  of  St  Paul 
and  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  there  are  many 
passages  which  show  that  there  must  have  been  in 
the  Early  Church  a  large  number  of  persons  interested 
in  speculations  upon  the  nature  and  work  of  Christ, 
and  capable  of  following  a  theological  discussion. 
Above  all,  the  words  of  our  Lord  Himself,  as  recorded 
in  St  John's  Gospel  and  elsewhere,  express  truths 
that  far  transcend  all  the  metaphysical  teachings  of 
the  Schools. 

But  then  there  comes  a  drop.  The  difference,  in 
point  of  intellectual  level,  between  the  books  of  the 
New  Testament  and  those  of  the  Apostolic  Fathers, 
is  extraordinary.  The  latter  deal  almost  exclusively 
with  practical  matters :  where  they  attempt  to  give 
an  allegorical  interpretation,  the  effect  is  usually 
puerile  and  grotesque.  We  search  in  vain  for  any- 
thing approaching  the  grandeur  of  the  prologue  to 
St  John's  Gospel  or  the  opening  chapter  of  the 
Epistle  to  the  Hebrews.  It  is  as  though  the  whole 
of  the  philosophical  side  of  Christianity  had  been 
forgotten. 

Now  it  is  probable  that  a  variety  of  causes 
contributed  to  this  result1.  The  age  of  persecution 
had  by  this  time  fairly  begun.  It  had  become 
obvious  that  persecution  was  to  be  the  settled  policy 
of  the  Roman  government  towards  the  Church,  and 
that  fact  would  of  itself  tend  to  make  men  lay  stress 
on  the  practical  rather  than  the  philosophical  side  of 
the  faith.  Again,  the  death  of  Philo  and  the  con- 

1  Cf.  de  Faye,  CUment  cFAlexandrie,  pp.  T  19  ff. 


Ill]  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHY  43 

sequent  decay  of  the  Jewish-Alexandrian  system 
removed  one  of  the  greatest  incitements  to  the 
development  of  Christian  philosophy.  Moreover  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  served  to  emphasize  what 
was  already  becoming  obvious,  that  the  main  work  of 
the  Church  must  lie,  not  in  the  recovery  of  the  Jews 
but  in  the  conversion  of  the  Gentiles :  and  in  this  wide 
field  of  action  there  were  preliminary  victories  to  be 
won  in  the  sphere  of  common  life  before  Christianity 
could  venture  to  measure  swords  with  the  great 
schools  of  heathen  thought. 

The  first  attempts  to  give  a  philosophical  bent  to 
Christian  speculation  were  not  encouraging.  They 
are  to  be  found  in  the  swarm  of  Gnostic  heresies  with 
which  the  Church  was  compelled  to  deal  in  the  first 
two  centuries  of  her  history.  One  and  all,  the 
Gnostics  claimed  to  be  setting  forth  a  form  of  the 
faith  truer  and  more  philosophical  than  that  to  which 
ordinary  Christians  were  accustomed,  but  they  went 
astray  through  failing  to  grasp  what  are  the  funda- 
mental truths  of  Christianity,  and  what  the  limits 
outside  which  speculation  ceases  to  be  Christian.  So 
that  in  one  way  it  is  possible  that  the  Gnostics 
actually  retarded  the  reconciliation  between  Church 
and  School,  for  the  upholders  of  the  true  faith  may 
well  have  thought  it  wisest  to  avoid  unnecessary 
speculation  and  to  refuse  the  study  of  philosophy  in 
any  shape  or  form. 

But  this  state  of  things  could  not  last  for  ever. 
Gradually,  as  time  went  on,  the  Church  began  to 
attract  men  of  culture,  and  by  the  year  150  A.D.  we 
find  Justin  Martyr  suggesting  that  philosophy  should 


44  THE   FIRST   BEGINNINGS   OF  [ill 

be  regarded  as  God's  revelation  to  the  Greeks,  and 
claiming  for  Socrates,  Plato  and  the  rest,  a  position 
not  unlike  that  held  by  Moses  and  the  prophets  under 
the  Jewish  dispensation.  It  is  true  that  the  change 
did  not  come  in  a  moment.  Tatian,  the  pupil  of 
Justin,  hates  philosophers  of  all  sorts,  and  Tertullian 
makes  them  responsible  for  the  whole  of  the  Gnostic 
heresies.  But  the  words  of  Justin  show  that  the  tide 
is  already  turning,  and  prepare  us  for  the  development 
of  a  new  system  of  speculative  Christianity. 

Alexandria  was  the  place  in  which  this  rapproche- 
ment between  Christianity  and  philosophy  found  the 
most  congenial  soil.  It  had  been  from  the  first  one 
of  the  most  important  centres  of  literary  and  intel- 
lectual life,  and  its  Museum  and  libraries,  its  staff  of 
Professors  and  classes  of  students,  indeed  the  whole 
atmosphere  of  the  place  encouraged  the  growth  of  a 
liberal  spirit  of  investigation.  It  is  not  surprising 
therefore  to  find  at  Alexandria  a  great  Catechetical 
School,  which  did  not  merely  provide  elementary 
instruction  for  those  desirous  of  admission  into  the 
Church,  but  formed,  as  it  were,  "  a  denominational 
College  by  the  side  of  a  secular  University1." 

Of  the  early  history  of  the  Catechetical  School  we 
know  but  little,2.  It  is  probable  thattit  began  on  a 
small  scale,  without  any  official  sanction  from  the 
rulers  of  the  Church,  and  developed  gradually  as 
opportunity  arose.  We  find  the  school  in  existence, 
soon  after  the  middle  of  the  second  century,  under 
the  presidency  of  Pantaenus3;  but  our  information 

1  Bigg,  Christian  Platonists,  p.  42.  2  de  Faye,  p.  31. 

3  Eus.  Hist.  Eccl.  5.  10. 


Ill]  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHY  45 

with  regard  to  it  is  scanty  until  we  reach  the  days  of 
Pantaenus'  disciple  and  successor,  the  famous  Clement 
of  Alexandria. 

It  would  appear  that  Clement  was  born,  either 
at  Athens  or  at  Alexandria,  about  the  year  150  A.D. 
In  his  youth  he  travelled  widely,  and  he  must  also 
have  been  one  of  the  best  read  men  of  his  time  :  at  all 
events  there  is  no  other  Christian  writer  of  the  first 
three  centuries  who  shows  so  intimate  a  knowledge  of 
Greek  literature.  Unlike  Origen,  he  was  not  the  son 
of  Christian  parents,  but  his  conversion  seems  to  have 
resembled  that  described  in  Justin's  Dialogue  with 
Trypho :  the  desire  for  a  closer  contemplation  of  the 
Divine  having  led  him,  first  to  the  study  of  Plato  and 
Greek  philosophy,  then  to  the  Old  Testament  and 
the  prophets,  and  lastly  to  Christ.  It  was,  in  fact,  an 
intellectual  rather  than  a  moral  conversion,  so  that 
it  is  not  surprising  to  find  that  Clement's  love  for 
philosophy  is  in  no  way  impaired  by  his  profession  of 
Christianity. 

The  earliest  of  his  extant  works  is  addressed  to 
thoughtful  pagans1.  This  is  the  Protrepticus,  or 
"  Hortatory  wonj  to  the  Gentiles,"  in  which  Clement 
begins  by  endeavouring  to  release  his  reader  from 
popular  superstitions.  He  deals  with  Greek  myth- 
ology, with  the  public  worship  of  the  pagan  gods,  and 
with  the  Mysteries,  and  then  he  proceeds  to  the 
speculations  of  philosophy.  These,  attractive  as  they 
are,  still  create  a  blank  which  they  cannot  entirely 
fill.  They  produce  a  longing  for  fuller  knowledge, 
and  for  more  direct  communion  with  God,  which  can 

1  de  Faye,  pp.  54  ff. 


46  THE   FIRST   BEGINNINGS   OF  [ill 

be  satisfied  only  by  the  study  of  Holy  Scripture. 
There  can  be  little  doubt  that  this  gives  a  true 
picture  of  Clement's  own  conversion,  and  that  it 
indicates  clearly  the  position  which  he  assigns  to 
Greek  philosophy. 

Following  on  the  Protrepticus  come  the  three 
books  of  the  Paedagogus  or  "  Tutor1."  The  Protrep- 
ticus sets  forth  the  Logos  as  the  Converter  of  souls  : 
the  Paedagogus  is  intended  to  describe  to  the  new 
convert  the  Logos  considered  as  the  Educator  of 
souls.  Clement  makes  no  attempt  to  set  forth  a 
complete  system  of  education.  He  indicates  a 
method,  and  leaves  each  individual  to  formulate  his 
own  scheme.  The  first  book  describes  the  need  of  a 
Paedagogus,  the  love  of  Christ  for  man,  and  His 
methods  of  dealing  with  men.  In  the  second  and 
third  books  we  find  descriptions  of  the  vices  of 
heathen  life,  and  of  various  forms  of  wrongdoing 
which  the  Christian  must  avoid. 

It  was  Clement's  intention  to  write  a  third  treatise 
which  was  to  be  styled  the  "  Teacher "  and  was  to 
contain  his  system  of  Christian  philosophy.  This, 
however,  was  never  written,  and  in  its  place  we  have 
eight  books  of  Miscellanies,  quaintly  described  as 
Stromates  or  "  Clothes-bags."  That  the  Stromates 
were  not  intended  to  take  the  place  of  the  Teacher  is 
made  clear  by  a  number  of  passages  in  which  Clement 
speaks  of  the  latter  work  as  still  unwritten2.  They 
are  to  be  regarded  rather  as  preliminary  essays 
dealing  with  parts  of  the  subject,  and  as  such  they 

1  de  Faye,  pp.  64  ff. 

2  e.g.  Strom.  7.  59  end. 


Ill]  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHY  47 

are  by  no  means  devoid  of  interest.  Thus  we  may 
learn  from  the  elaborate  apology  with  which  the  first 
book  opens,  that  the  intellectual  and  speculative 
Christians  for  whom  Clement  was  writing,  were,  even 
at  Alexandria,  in  a  minority.  Indeed,  so  great  was 
the  number  of  those  who  shared  the  view  that 
philosophy  and  Greek  culture  were  apt  to  lead  men 
to  heresy  and  unbelief,  and  that  it  was  therefore  best 
to  leave  these  things  alone,  that  Clement  actually 
goes  out  of  his  way  to  defend  even  the  practice  of 
literary  composition.  He  treats  these  upholders  of  a 
narrower  Christianity  with  unfailing  courtesy  and 
consideration,  endeavouring  always  to  convert  rather 
than  to  confute  them  ;  and  it  is  to  the  credit  of  both 
parties  that  there  was  never  any  open  breach  between 
them. 

The  aim  of  Clement  of  Alexandria  was  to  absorb 
into  his  teaching  all  that  was  good  in  Greek  thought, 
whilst  rejecting  all  that  was  bad  and  worthless.  To 
reject  the  whole  of  Greek  philosophy,  as  the  majority 
of  the  early  Fathers  had  done,  was  becoming  in- 
creasingly difficult  and  unwise :  to  accept  good  and 
bad  indiscriminately  involved  serious  risk  of  running 
into  Gnostic  and  other  heresies. 

It  was  necessary  to  find  some  standard,  and  the 
test  which  Clement  adopted  was  partly  ethical  and 
partly  theological.  Thus  he  rejected  Epicureanism 
altogether1.  A  system,  based  on  Atheism,  which 
taught  that  pleasure  was  the  guiding  principle  of  life, 
won  but  scant  praise  from  him.  Nor  did  the  Stoics 
rank  high  in  his  estimation  ;  for  did  not  they  teach 

1  Protr.  66  end;  Strom,  i.  i. 


48  THE   FIRST   BEGINNINGS   OF  [ill 

that  God  is  a  corporeal  being1  ?  Plato  and  Pytha- 
goras— the  Pythagoras  not  of  history  but  of  legend 
— are  the  two  philosophers  who  excite  his  greatest 
admiration ;  but  he  does  not  confine  himself  to  the 
doctrines  of  any  single  school.  Philosophy,  ac- 
cording to  his  definition2  includes  all  teaching  that 
conduces  to  righteousness  and  sound  learning,  and  he 
accepts  all  teaching  to  which  this  definition  can  be 
applied. 

t  From  these  diverse  elements  of  philosophy  and 
Christian  doctrine,  the  theology  of  Clement  was 
derived.  It  remains  for  us  to  enquire  how  far  this 
theological  system  was  taken  over  from  the  philo- 
sophers, and  to  what  extent  it  was  the  result  of  purely 
Christian  influences.  Broadly  speaking  the  system  of 
Clement  may  be  divided  into  three  main  sections — 
his  conception  of  God,  his  conception  of  the  Logos, 
and  his  ethical  teaching.  And  in  the  main,  the  first 
of  these  sections  is  largely  derived  from  Plato,  the 
second  from  Philo,  and  the  third  from  Aristotle. 

The  portions  of  Plato's  philosophy  which  appealed 
most  strongly  to  thinkers  of  the  second  and  third 
centuries  were  his  doctrine  of  the  Ideas  and  his 
conception  of  God  as  the  Idea  of  "  The  Good."  This 
doctrine  Clement  accepts  and  repeatedly  emphasizes 
in  language  that  is  unmistakeable.  God,  he  says3  is 
independent  of  time  and  space  and  all  physical 
limitations.  He  is  not  to  be  described,  unless 
metaphorically,  in  anthropomorphic  terms4,  for  God  is 
not  man-like,  nor  has  he  need  of  senses  like  ours. 

1  Strom,  i.  51.         2  Strom,  i.  37. 

3  Strom.  2..  6.          4  Strom.  4.  153,  7.  37. 


Ill]  CHRISTIAN    PHILOSOPHY  49 

Clement  even  goes  beyond  the  language  of  Plato  and 
states1  that  God  transcends  not  merely  the  physical 
but  even  the  intelligible  world.  He  is  devoid  of 
passions,  and  can  be  defined  only  as  pure  Being.  At 
the  same  time  it  must  not  be  thought  that  Clement's 
conception  of  God  is  derived  exclusively  from  Platonic 
sources.  When  describing  the  goodness  of  God,  he 
goes  far  beyond  the  philosophers,  and  adds  touches 
that  are  unmistakeably  Christian,  telling  us2  that  God 
does  not  emit  goodness  automatically  and  of  necessity, 
as  a  fire  emits  heat,  the  process  is  voluntary  and 
conscious.  We  have  here  escaped  from  the  conception 
of  God  as  a  mere  philosophical  abstraction,  and 
passed  to  the  Christian  doctrine  of  a  wise  and  loving 
Father. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  enter  upon  a  detailed  dis- 
cussion of  the  two  remaining  sections  of  Clement's 
system.  His  doctrine  of  the  Logos  is  in  great 
measure  identical  with  that  of  Philo  :  but  here  too 
Clement  adds  touches  which  make  it  plain  that  he  is 
describing  no  mere  hypothetical  being,  but  the  Word 
Who  became  flesh  for  the  redemption  of  the  world. 
And  it  is  the  same  with  his  ethical  teaching.  This  is 
centred  in  the  person  of  the  true  Gnostic3,  who  is  in 
many,  respects  similar  to  the  "  Wise  Man  "  of  Stoic 
tradition.  But,  even  here,  Christian  Love  as  well  as 
Knowledge,  forms  one  of  the  mainsprings  of  the 
ideal  character. 

The  foregoing  account  will  make  sufficiently  clear 
the  attitude  of  the  Christian  Church  towards  the 
great  schools  of  Greek  thought  in  the  years  that 

1  Strom.  5.  39.      2  Strom.  7.  42.       3  Strom.  7.  i  ff. 


E.  N. 


5O  FIRST  BEGINNINGS  OF  CHRISTIAN  PHILOSOPHY  [ill 

immediately  precede  the  rise  of  Neoplatonism.  The 
vast  majority  of  Christians  had  little  taste  for 
philosophy,  but  a  minority,  small  in  numbers  though 
of  no  mean  ability,  was  endeavouring  to  claim  for 
Christianity  the  fruits  of  Greek  speculation.  In  a 
previous  chapter  some  attempt  has  been  made  to 
point  out  what  portions  of  each  system  were  incor- 
porated in  the  teaching  of  the  Neoplatonists.  It  is 
not  impossible  that  the  work  of  Clement  was  known 
to  the  founders  of  that  School — indeed  if  there  is  any 
truth  in  the  story  that  Ammonius  Saccas  was  at  one 
time  a  Christian1,  it  can  hardly  have  been  otherwise. 
And  there  are  close  analogies  to  be  traced  in  some 
points  of  detail  between  the  doctrines  of  Clement  and 
of  Plotinus.  It  may  well  be,  for  instance,  that 
Clement's  description  of  the  beatific  vision2  influenced 
Plotinus  in  his  conception  of  ecstasy,  and  that  there 
is  some  connexion  between  the  Christian  Father's 
description  of  the  Holy  Trinity8  and  that  later 
enunciated  by  the  great  Neoplatonist  We  may 
notice  however  that  such  indebtedness  is  nowhere 
acknowledged,  indeed  if  it  exists  it  has  been  care- 
fully concealed,  for  in  the  writings  of  Plotinus  there 
is  not  a  single  reference  either  to  the  historical  facts 
on  which  the  Christian  faith  rests,  or  to  the  theological 
speculations  that  have  been  based  upon  them. 

1  Porph.  apud  Eus.  Hist.  Ecd.  6.  19. 

2  Strom.  7.  12,  13.  3  e.g.  Strom.  4.  158. 


CHAPTER   IV 

THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM 

IN  the  foregoing  pages  an  attempt  has  been  made 
to  give  a  general  sketch  of  the  prevailing  conditions 
of  thought,  alike  in  religion  and  philosophy,  in  the 
period  immediately  preceding  the  first  appearance  of 
Neoplatonism.  In  the  present  chapter  it  is  proposed 
to  give  a  brief  account  of  the  external  history  of  the 
school,  together  with  the  names  and  dates  of  the 
great  leaders  of  Neoplatonic  thought,  and  the  chief 
contemporary  Christian  writers,  pointing  out  the 
broad  relations  between  Christianity  and  philosophy 
at  each  stage  of  the  history.  In  this  way  we  may 
hope  to  obtain  a  general  impression  of  the  history  of 
the  school,  which  will  serve  to  place  the  more 
detailed  discussions  of  the  various  stages  in  their  true 
perspective. 

The  founder  of  the  school  was  Ammonius  Saccas. 
Of  him  and  of  his  teaching  we  have  but  little  infor- 
mation, and  of  that  little,  much  is  by  no  means  certain. 
According  to  Porphyry1  he  was  born  at  Alexandria 

1  Eus.  Hist.  EccL  6.  19. 

4—2 


52  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

of  Christian  parents :  he  was  himself  a  Christian  in 
his  younger  days,  but  afterwards  reverted  to  paganism. 
This  account  is  quoted  by  Eusebius,  who  proceeds 
to  say  that  the  story  of  his  apostasy  is  a  fabrication. 
The  Christian  writers  do  not  claim  Ammonius  as  an 
ally,  but  apparently  they  are  anxious  to  prevent  the 
apologists  of  paganism  from  making  capital  out  of 
the  story  that  the  first  great  Neoplatonist  had  been 
converted  from  Christianity  to  the  purer  faith  of  his 
pagan  fellow-countrymen1.  His  second  name  is  said 
to  be  an  abbreviated  form  of  Saccophorus  and  to  be 
derived  from  the  fact  that  for  some  time  he  made 
his  living  as  a  porter.  The  dates  of  his  birth  and 
death  are  both  unknown,  but  he  must  have  begun 
lecturing  in  or  before  231  A.D.,  since  in  that  year 
his  lectures  were  attended  by  Plotinus2,  the  most 
illustrious  of  his  pupils.  The  other  disciples  of 
Ammonius  whose  names  have  been  preserved,  include 
Longinus,  the  rhetorician  long  supposed  to  be  the 
author  of  the  treatise  De .  Sublimitate,  the  great 
Christian  writer  Origenes  Adamantius,  besides  another 
Origenes,  and  Herennius,  of  whom  nothing  further  is 
known.  Like  Socrates  in  earlier  days,  Ammonius 
wrote  no  books ;  and  there  is  even  a  story  that  he 
forbade  his  pupils  to  divulge  his  teaching.  It  is 
therefore  difficult  to  form  an  opinion  upon  his  merits 
as  a  philosopher,  since  we  cannot  say  how  far  the 
doctrines  of  Plotinus  were  new,  and  how  far  derived 
from  his  master. 


1  Maurice,  Moral  and  Metaphysical  Philosophy,  p.  316. 

2  Porph.  Vit.  Plot.  3. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  53 

i 

Plotinus  succeeded  him  as  the  head  of  the  new 
school.  With  regard  to  this  philosopher  we  have  a 
considerable  amount  of  information,  since,  in  addition 
to  a  series  of  fifty-four  treatises  from  his  pen,  we 
possess  a  memoir  of  him  written  by  Porphyry,  his 
favourite  disciple  and  literary  executor.  From  this 
document  and  from  the  notices  in  Eunapius,  Vitae 
Philosophorum,  we  gather  the  following  facts.  He 
was  born  at  Lycopolis  in  Egypt,  about  the  year 
203  A.D.1  and  he  commenced  the  study  of  philosophy 
at  the  age  of  28.  After  attending  the  lectures  of 
Ammonius  for  eleven  years,  he  joined  Gordianus' 
expedition  to  the  East  in  the  year  242,  hoping  thereby 
to  be  able  to  study  the  philosophy  of  Persia.  The 
expedition  however  was  a  failure.  Gordianus  was 
killed,  and  Plotinus,  after  barely  escaping  with  his 
life,  made  his  way  first  to  Antioch,  and  soon  after- 
wards to  Rome.  Herennius  and  Origenes  had 
already  broken  the  compact  to  reveal  none  of  their 
master's  teaching  :  and  finally  Plotinus,  feeling  him- 
self no  longer  bound  to  observe  it,  began  to  frame  his 
discourses  on  the  lectures  of  Ammonius.  Following 
the  example  however  of  his  master,  he  delivered  his 
teaching  solely  in  an  oral  form  until  the  year  262  A.D.2, 
when  he  was  persuaded  to  write  twenty-one  treatises 
for  private  circulation,  and  in  the  next  six  years  he 
wrote  twenty-four  more.  Nine  more  were  written 
before  his  death  in  269  A.D.,  and  the  whole  series  of 
fifty-four  treatises  was  subsequently  arranged  and 

1   Vit.  Plot,  2,  3;  Suidas,  Plotinus.  *   Vit.  Plot.  4—6. 


54  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

edited  by  Porphyry,  forming  the  six  Enneads  which 
we  still  possess. 

His  system1  has  for  its  object  the  search  for  the 
first  principles  of  the  universe,  and  aims  at  a  syste- 
matic exposition  of  the  origin  and  nature  of  the  world : 
whilst,  side  by  side  with  this,  comes  his  practical  aim, 
to  enable  each  individual  man  to  rise  to  the  highest 
development  of  his  nature,  and  so  to  proceed  ulti- 
mately to  immediate  union  with  "the  divine."  His 
method  is  eclectic:  indeed  there  is  hardly  a  branch  of 
Greek  or  Roman  speculation,  from  which  he  does 
not  levy  some  contribution.  His  teaching  however 
is  no  mere  re-statement  of  current  philosophy :  it  is 
a  return  to  the  original  doctrines  of  Plato.  At  the 
same  time  these  are  read  in  the  spirit  of  the  age,  so 
that  while  some  elements  are  neglected,  others  are 
sometimes  pressed  further  towards  their  logical 
conclusions  than  in  the  dialogues  of  Plato  himself. 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  Plotinus  does  not  attempt 

to  establish  his  fundamental  doctrines  by  argument. 

The   highest   knowledge,   according   to   his   view,  is 

attained  not  through  logical  deduction  but  by  pure 

*  intuition :    and    he    therefore   enunciates   his    system 

t  without  any  endeavour  to  prove  it.     In  so  doing  he  is 

<  merely  following  the  fashion  of  his  time.     The  great 

popularity   of  "  Mysteries,"    to  which   reference   has 

already  been  made,  is  an  indication  of  men's  readiness 

to  accept  mystical  teaching  about  the  future  state  of 

the  soul,  upon  the  bare  authority  of  their  instructors  ; 

and   although   there   is   no    evidence    that    Plotinus 

encouraged  attendance  at  such  rites,  it  may  well  be 

1  Cf.  Whittaker,  The  Neoplatonists ,  c.  v. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  55 

that  the  form  in  which  his  teaching  has  come  down  to 
us,  was  affected  by  the  prevalence  of  such  "Mysteries" 
and  by  the  spirit  of  obedience  to  authority  which  it 
indicates.  It  is  however  to  be  remembered  that 
Plotinus  was  a  speaker  rather  than  a  writer,  and  it  is 
possible  that  in  his  lectures  he  may  have  adduced 
arguments  which  he  did  not  include  in  his  written 
works. 

The  system  revolves  about  the  idea  of  a  threefold 
principle,  which  appears  alike  in  the  universe  around 
us  and  in  our  own  human  nature.  The  Deity  Him- 
self is  threefold,  the  second  principle  emanating  from 
the  first  and  the  third  from  the  second.  The  first 
principle1  is  variously  styled  TO  ov,  TO  dyaQov,  TO  ev, — 
essential  Existence,  Goodness,  Unity  :  the  second  is 
Z/OT)?,  or  Universal  Mind2,  the  creative  principle  of  the 
world  of  Ideas,  whilst  the  third  is  ^vyr)  the  World- 
soul.  This  like  Mind  is  immaterial,  but  standing  as 
it  does  between  Mind  and  the  material  world,  it  has 
elected  to  become  disintegrated,  and  united  with  the 
world  of  phenomena.  The  objects  created  by  this 
World-soul  are  themselves  souls  of  various  kinds3, 
including  those  of  men  :  and  these  souls  are  capable 
either  of  rising  to  union  with  their  source,  or  of 
sinking  to  wallow  blindly  in  their  material  environ- 
ment. 

\  Below  this  Trinity  comes  fyvcns  or  Nature,  still  a 
creative  principle,  but  on  a  lower  level,  as  being 
directly  connected  with  matter4.  Creation  is  effected, 
according  to  Plotinus,  by  a  process  of  contemplation. 

1  Cf.  Enn.  2.  9.  i,  5.  -2.  i.  2  Enn.  5.  9.  6. 

3  Enn.  5.  2.  2.  4  Enn.  4.  4.  13. 


56  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

The  Mind  contemplates  in  The  One  that  which  is 
possible1,  and  by  continual  contemplation,  yet  ever 
with  fresh  difference,  it  produces  all  that  truly  exists, 
that  is  to  say  the  Universe  of  Ideas.  Similarly  it  is 
by  contemplation  that  the  Soul  creates,  but,  inas- 
much as  it  contemplates  The  One,  not  directly  but 
through  the  medium  of  the  Mind,  the  objects  created 
by  it  stand  on  a  lower  level  than  those  created  by  the 
Mind.  And  in  like  manner  Nature  gives  form  to 
formless  matter,  and  thus  creates  the  physical  world. 
Matter  is  regarded  as  indestructible,  and  as 
existing  before  the  present  world2.  Its  existence 
however  is  negative  rather  than  positive,  for  apart 
from  reason  it  is  formless  and  barren  :  indeed,  the 
forms  which  matter  assumes  in  the  physical  world  are 
in  all  cases  due,  not  to  itself,  but  to  reason.  Plotinus 
argues3  against  those  who  maintained  that  Plato's 
Matter  signified  empty  space,  but  he  agrees  with 
most  Platonists  in  holding  that  neither  the  beginning 
nor  the  end  of  the  world  can  be  found  in  time,  and 
that  in  this  sense  the  universe  is  eternal.  TheTsoul 
of  the  universe,  like  the  soul  of  the  individual,  is 
regarded  as  in  some  sense  bound  up  with  its  material 
surroundings  ;  so  that,  to  a  certain  extent,  it  is  in  a 
real  sense  subject  to  Necessity  or  Destiny.  Rational 
action  however  is  always  from  within,  so  that  virtue 
is  always  free4.  The  object  of  the  World-soul  is  so  to 
pervade  this  universe  as  to  bring  all  the  parts  into 
harmony.  But  in  practice  we  find  discord,  resulting 
in  constant  change,  and  the  absence  of  all  except 

1  Enn.  5.  9.  6.  2  Enn.  2.  4.  5.  3  Enn.  2.  4.  u. 

i.  i.  10. 


1  Enn.  5.  9.  6.  »  Ei 

4  Whittaker,  p.  78  ;  Enn.  3. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  57 

mere  illusory  existence.  Men  seek  for  the  Good  and 
cannot  attain  to  it,  and  therefore  they  become  unjust. 
Evil  is  a  lack  of  the  Good  ;  and,  in  a  universe  of 
separate  existences,  the  presence  of  good  in  one  place 
implies  its  absence  in  another1.  Now  if  the  presence 
of  evil  in  the  world  be  admitted,  its  prevalence  is  not 
difficult  to  explain.  The  world  is  not  perfect :  it  is 
a  mixed  universe,  and  most  of  the  souls  which  it 
contains  are  neither  very  good  nor  very  bad,  but 
occupy  an  intermediate  position.  Nor  is  it  difficult 
to  explain  the  apparent  success  of  bad  men.  This 
is  partly  due  to  the  inertness  of  their  victims,  who 
deserve  to  suffer  for  not  attempting  to  resist  their 
attacks,  and  it  is  in  part  explained  by  the  fact  that 
the  wicked  are  thus  led  on  to  reap  their  own  punish- 
ment, alike  in  their  moral  degradation  during  their 
present  life,  and  in  its  consequences  hereafter2. 

But  the  problem  of  the  cause  of  the  existence  of 
evil  is  not  affected  by  these  considerations,  and  the 
solution  which  Plotinus  offers  is  perhaps  the  weakest 
point  in  his  system.  He  professes  to  reject  all 
Gnostic  views  of  the  essential  inherence  of  evil  in 
Matter,  and  to  believe  in  a  single  supreme  deity,  at 
once  omnipotent  and  benevolent.  But,  when  pressed 
to  explain  the  existence  of  evil,  he  is  driven  to  take 
refuge  in  Gnostic  dualism  and  Gnostic  hatred  of 
things  material.  The  reason  that  he  gives  is,  that 
the  universe  rests  on  a  substratum  of  matter3,  the 
dark  principle,  incapable  of  producing  anything 
beyond  itself,  and  therefore  incapable  of  adequately 
expressing  the  Good.  We  may  notice  that  Plotinus' 

1  Whittaker,  p.  79.        2  Whittaker,  p.  80.        3  Enn.  i.  8.  7. 


58  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

refusal  to  allow  his  portrait  to  be  painted1,  and  the 
shame  which  he  professed  to  feel  at  being  in  the  body, 
are  illustrations  of  the  same  feeling. 

In  his  psychology  Plotinus  still  adheres  to  a 
threefold  principle.  Man  possesses  Spirit,  Soul,  and 
Body,  and  thus  he  has  three  states  of  consciousness 
which  correspond  to  the  three  spheres  of  being  in  the 
universe.  Nor  is  it  surprising  to  find  that  the  virtues 
fall  into  three  classes2,  corresponding  to  the  three 
spheres  of  existence.  In  the  lowest  class  are  the 
"  political  virtues,"  which  are  necessary  for  all  men, 
their  aim  being  the  avoidance  of  evil.  In  the  second 
class,  to  which  the  philosopher  alone  can  attain,  are 
the  "  cathartic  virtues,"  whose  aim  is  the  destruction 
of  the  passions3.  The  third  and  highest  form  of 
virtue  lies  in  mystical  union  with  The  One.  This  is 
what  Plotinus  calls  Ecstasy,  and  it  is  not  a  faculty, 
nor  yet  a  habit,  but  a  state  of  the  soul,  to  which 
however  man  can  hope  to  attain  but  seldom  whilst  he 
is  in  the  body4.  That  Plotinus  did  believe  in  the 
possibility  of  effecting  such  union  even  on  earth, 
there  is  no  doubt ;  for  we  have  Porphyry's  statement5 
that  he  had  himself  attained  to  it  once,  in  his  sixty- 
eighth  year,  and  that  Plotinus,  during  the  seven  years 
of  Porphyry's  friendship  with  him,  enjoyed  it  four 
times.  This  teaching  about  ecstasy  carries  us  beyond 
the  realm  of  philosophy  into  that  of  pure  mysticism. 
At  the  same  time  it  is  not  without  its  philosophical 
basis.  Plotinus  accepted  in  its  entirety  the  Platonic 
doctrine  of  reminiscence,  and  the  state  of  ecstasy  is 

1  Porph.  Vit.  Plot.  i.  2  Whittaker,  p.  94. 

3  Enn.  i.  2.  4.  4  Enn.  6.  9.  n.  5   Vit.  Plot.  23. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  59 

neither  more  nor  less  than  the  temporary  realisation 
of  the  longing  which  the  spirit  feels  for  its  return  into 
the  world  of  Ideas. 

Such  in  brief  outline  is  the  system  of  Plotinus. 
It  is  clearer  and  more  definite  than  any  that  the 
Neopythagoreans  could  offer,  and  the  lofty  morality 
to  which  it  leads  commands  our  respect.  It  derives 
an  added  stateliness  from  the  haughty  refusal  of 
Plotinus  to  be  drawn  into  mere  recriminations  against 
the  upholders  of  other  systems :  indeed,  it  would  seem 
from  Porphyry's  account  that  he  preferred  to  leave  to 
his  pupils  the  task  of  refuting  antagonists,  as  being 
unworthy  of  his  own  attention.  At  all  events  it  is 
noticeable  that,  out  of  the  fifty-four  treatises  which  he 
wrote,  there  is  but  one1  which  is  definitely  controversial 
in  character,  and  this  is  hardly  an  exception,  since  it 
consists  for  the  most  part  of  a  dignified  recapitulation 
of  his  own  views,  in  the  expectation  that  this  alone 
will  be  sufficient  to  refute  those  of  his  opponents. 

In  life  and  character  Plotinus  seems  to  have 
exercised  a  peculiar  attraction  over  those  with  whom 
he  came  in  contact :  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  their 
enemies  do  not  venture  to  bring  any  charge  against 
the  personal  integrity  of  either  Plotinus  or  Porphyry: 
whilst  both  his  generosity  and  his  business  capacity 
are  illustrated  by  his  readiness,  when  need  arose,  to 
undertake  the  guardianship  of  his  friends'  children, 
and  by  his  skilful  administration  of  their  property. 
We  are  told  that  he  almost  succeeded  in  persuading 
the  Emperor  Gallienus  to  rebuild  one  of  the  ruined 
cities  of  Campania,  and  to  permit  him  to  have  it 

1  Enn.  2.  9. 


60  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

governed  on  Platonic  principles1.  That  he  was  not 
entirely  free  from  the  superstitions  of  his  time  is 
shown  by  the  story2  of  Olympius'  attempt  to  compass 
his  destruction  by  means  of  the  stars.  The  attempt 
failed,  but  Plotinus  admitted  that  it  had  nevertheless 
caused  him  some  discomfort. 

During  the  latter  part  of  his  life  he  suffered  from  an 
internal  malady,  for  which  he  refused  to  undergo  any 
regular  medical  treatment.  He  submitted  however  to 
massage  at  the  hands  of  his  attendants,  who  prevented 
the  malady  from  increasing  ;  but  at  length,  losing 
their  services  in  a  time  of  pestilence,  he  grew  worse, 
and  died3. 

ii 

The  new  leader  of  the  Neoplatonic  school  was  a 
man  of  Tyrian  descent,  born  in  the  year  233  A.D. 
His  original  name  was  Melek  or  Malchus  ;  and  this 
title  swas  occasionally  applied  to  him  throughout  his 
life.  He  was  however  more  commonly  known  by 
one  or  other  of  two  Greek  translations  of  his  Tyrian 
name — Basileus  or  Porphyrius4.  Porphyry  was  ac- 
quainted in  his  younger  days  with  the  Christian 
Origen5,  and,  after  studying  at  Athens  under  Longinus 
and  Apollonius,  he  came  to  Rome  in  262  A.D.,  where 
he  met  Plotinus,  and  after  a  short  period  of  opposi- 
tion became  his  most  enthusiastic  disciple6.  At  the 
end  of  six  years  he  found  himself  suffering  from 
melancholy,  and  seemed  to  be  in  danger  of  losing 
his  reason :  but,  adopting  the  advice  of  Plotinus,  he 

1   Vit.  Plot.  11.        2   Vit.  Plot.  10.  3   Vit.  Plot.  2. 

4   Vit.  Plot.  17.        5  Eus.  Hist.  Eccl.  6.  19.        6   Vit.  Plot.  18. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  6 1 

sought  relief  in  foreign  travel,  and  lived  for  some  time 
in  Sicily1.  Of  the  details  of  his  later  life  we  know 
but  little  :  he  returned  to  Rome,  where,  perhaps  as 
late  as  302  A.D.  he  married  Marcella,  a  Roman  lady, 
and  the  widow  of  a  friend2.  Ten  months  later  he 
went  abroad  on  what  he  describes  as  "business 
connected  with  the  affairs  of  the  Greeks  and  the  will 
of  the  gods3."  It  would  seem  that  he  died  in  Rome 
in  or  about  the  year  305  A.D. 

Porphyry  was  a  man  of  great  learning,  but  of  no 
striking  originality.  As  the  biographer  and  literary 
executor  of  Plotinus,  he  made  the  exposition  and 
defence  of  his  master's  teaching  the  chief  work  of  his 
life.  His  own  additions  to  Neoplatonism  dealt,  for 
the  most  part,  with  the  practical  bearing  of  philosophy. 
Thus  he  taught  that  the  cause  of  evil  lies  not  in  the 
body  but  in  the  soul4,  and  that  the  end  of  all  philosophy 
is  holiness.  In  fact,  if  Neoplatonism  reached  its 
highest  perfection  in  metaphysical  speculation  under 
Plotinus,  it  is  Porphyry  who  marks  its  highest  ethical 
development.  His  extant  writings  are  not  numerous. 
The  Life  of  Plotinus  has  already  been  mentioned, 
and  his  other  principal  works  are  a  Life  of  Pythagoras, 
a  vegetarian  treatise  in  four  books  "  De  abstinentia  ab 
esu  animalium"  the  "  Sententiae"  containing  some  of 
his  expositions  of  Plotinus,  a  short  tract  "  de  antro 
Nympharum"  an  Introduction  to  the  Categories  of 
Aristotle ',  and  two  Letters  addressed  respectively  to 
Anebon  and  Marcella. 

It    was    apparently   the    intention    of    Porphyry 

1   Vit.  Plot.  5,  6.  2  Porph.  Ad  Marc.  i. 

3  Ad  Marc.  4.  4  Ad  Marc.  29. 


62  THE   HISTORY  OF    NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

to  combine  direct  opposition  to  Christianity  with 
the  attitude  of  superiority  to  pagan  systems  which 
characterized  Plotinus.  He  wrote  an  important 
treatise  against  Christianity1,  which  seems  to  have 
formed  one  of  the  most  serious  literary  attacks  ever 
made  upon  the  Church;  but  his  attitude  of  superiority 
to  the  popular  religion  was  not  always  maintained. 
There  was  by  this  time  a  growing  tendency,  especially 
in  the  Syrian  school  of  Neoplatonists,  to  lay  stress 
upon  magical  or  "  theurgical "  practices ;  and  there 
are  passages  in  which  Porphyry  displays  a  certain 
sympathy  with  this  tendency.  He  quotes  Philo 
Byblius2  to  prove  that  the  Greek  gods  were  identical 
with  those  of  Persia,  and  he  defends  the  use  of  images 
even  to  the  extent  of  giving  a  mystical  interpretation 
to  the  materials  of  which  they  were  made3.  But  these 
passages  are  the  exception  rather  than  the  rule.  Por- 
phyry remains  too  thoroughly  Greek  to  agree  with 
the  Syrian  school  in  considering  theurgical  rites  to 
be  of  primary  importance :  and  in  the  letter  to 
Anebon  he  makes  his  protest  against  them.  This 
document  is  addressed  to  an  Egyptian  priest,  and  in 
it  Porphyry  takes  up  the  position  of  a  critic.  He 
does  not  question  the  existence  of  the  gods,  but  he 
wishes  to  be  convinced  that  men  are  right  in  assign- 
ing them  to  special  localities,  or  in  supposing  that 
they  are  to  be  propitiated  by  special  forms  of 
worship.  The  other  side  replied  by  issuing  the 
famous  treatise  De  Mysteriis,  though  it  is  uncertain 

1  Eus.  Hist.  Ecd.  6.  19. 

2  Porph.  apud  Eus.  Praep.  Evang.  r.  10. 

3  Porph.  apud  Eus.  Praep.  Evang.  3.7. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  63 

whether  this  work  was  known  to  Porphyry  or  pub- 
lished only  after  his  death.  In  any  case  the  book  is 
definitely  styled  a  reply  to  Porphyry's  letter,  and  it 
may  almost  be  considered  the  official  apology  of  the 
Neoplatonists  for  their  defence,  not  merely  of  paganism 
in  general,  but  of  the  actual  forms  of  worship  then  in 
vogue. 

The  writer  professes  to  be  an  Egyptian  priest1, 
but  there  is  no  doubt  that  he  is  a  Greek  and  more- 
over a  Neoplatonist.  He  betrays  his  Greek  origin 
both  by  his  general  style  and  by  definite  references 
to  sundry  points  of  Greek  literature  with  which  a 
foreigner  would  hardly  be  acquainted.  His  tone  of 
authority  is  in  keeping,  not  only  with  his  assumed 
character  of  Egyptian  priest,  but  also  with  his  position 
as  defender  of  ritual  and  mysticism  as  parts  of  a 
divine  revelation.  The  range  of  topics  with  which 
he  proposes  to  deal  is  startling — Theology  and 
Theurgy,  Philosophy,  Ethics,  and  Teleology — but  it 
shows  what  a  variety  of  subjects  had  by  this  time 
been  grouped  together  under  the  general  head  of 
Neoplatonism. 

We  cannot  here  follow  the  writer  in  detail,  as 
point  by  point  he  discusses  Porphyry's  letter  and 
parries  or  refutes  one  after  another  of  his  contentions. 
His  main  positions  are  these.  Like  Plotinus  he  holds 
that  the  existence  of  the  gods  is  not  in  the  ordinary 
sense  an  object  of  knowledge,  capable  of  being  proved 
or  disproved  by  logical  methods,  and  of  being  grasped 
by  the  rational  faculty2.  It  is  rather  a  matter  of 

1  Cf.  Maurice,  Moral  and  Metaphysical  Philosophy,  pp.  333  ff. 

2  De  Mysteriis,  i .  3. 


64  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

which  all  men  have  an  innate  and  indefinable  con- 
sciousness, so  that  the  most  that  argument  and  reason 
can  do  is  to  distinguish  between  the  various  orders  of 
the  gods.  They  are  not  to  be  called  corporeal,  though 
their  essence  permeates  all  physical  nature1.  Nor  have 
they  any  need  of  our  sacrifices  and  prayers,  though 
these  have  a  real  value  for  men,  as  links  of  communi- 
cation with  the  divine2.  Now  we  must  offer  prayers 
and  sacrifices  to  the  lower  divinities  because,  although 
worship  of  The  One  is  infinitely  higher  and  nobler, 
yet  the  possibility  of  attaining  to  such  worship  comes 
to  very  few  and  even  to  them  it  comes  but  late  in 
life3.  Moreover,  the  lower  deities  are  affected  by 
prayers,  and  even  by  threats,  provided  that  these  are 
uttered  not  by  mere  laymen  but  by  duly  qualified 
priests4.  Lastly,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
theurgist  is  moved  by  the  highest  and  purest  of 
aims  :  his  constant  endeavour  is  to  raise  man  step 
by  step  from  his  natural  state  of  degradation,  till  at 
length  he  attains  to  union  with  the  eternal5. 

This  then  is  the  argument  brought  forward  in 
defence  of  polytheism  and  mystical  ritual,  and  it 
illustrates  at  once  the  strength  and  the  weakness  of 
Neoplatonism.  It  shows  how  Neoplatonism,  when  no 
longer  able  to  produce  a  teacher  capable  of  following 
in  the  steps  of  Plotinus,  or  even  of  Porphyry,  could 
still  summon  to  its  aid  all  that  conservatism,  which 
forms  so  important  a  factor  in  the  retardation  of  any 
religious  movement ;  and  how,  by  affording  a  quasi- 

1  De  Myst.  i.  8,  i.  17.  2  De  Myst.  i.  12,  5.  10. 

3  De  Myst.  5.  22.  4  De  Myst.  6.  5. 

5  De  Myst.  10.  5,  6. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  65 

philosophical  justification  to  all  forms  of  pagan  wor- 
ship, it  could  rally  round  its  standard  all  who  were 
interested  in  the  preservation  of  the  old  system.  On 
the  other  hand  the  weakness  of  Neoplatonism  is  no 
less  apparent ;  for  the  writer  of  the  De  Mysteriis  has 
to  confess  that  the  highest  religion  is  but  for  the  few, 
and  that  with  all  its  boasted  comprehensiveness  Neo- 
platonism still  lacked  the  simple  universality  of  the 
Gospel. 

iii 

With  the  death  of  Porphyry  the  first  chapter  in 
the  history  of  Neoplatonism  comes  to  an  end.  The 
early  Alexandrian  Neoplatonists  disappear,  and  their 
place  is  taken  by  the  Syrian  school  to  which  reference 
has  already  been  made.  The  great  representative  of 
this  school  is  lamblichus,  who  stands  first  alike  in 
time  and  reputation.  His  importance  is  shown  both 
by  the  high  position  which  he  enjoyed  among  his 
contemporaries  and  by  the  respect  with  which  he  is 
mentioned  by  Proclus  a  century  later.  He  developed 
the  Oriental  side  of  Neoplatonism,  his  chief  additions 
being  connected  with  numerical  speculations  and 
mysticism.  Thus  he  elaborated  a  logical  series  of 
triads  and  a  theory  upon  the  various  orders  of  the 
gods.  He  also  made  considerable  additions  to  the 
system  of  Plotinus1,  inventing  a  new  principle  styled 
"  The  One  without  participation "  (TO  €v  apeOeicTov) 
which  he  declared  to  be  superior  to  The  Good,  and 
adding  further  a  series  of  Intellectual,  Supramundane, 

1  Cf.  Erdmann,  Hist,  of  Philosophy,  tr.  Hough,  i.  p.  248. 


E.   N. 


5 

OF  THE  ^S 


66  THE  HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

and  Mundane  deities1,  which  he  made  to  correspond 
respectively  to  Mind,  Soul,  and  Nature,  though  superior 
to  them  in  each  instance.  The  improvement  which 
he  endeavoured  to  bring  into  the  system  was  twofold. 
In  the  first  place,  there  was  the  refinement  which 
sought  to  discover  principles  whose  relation  to  the 
first  principles  of  Plotinus  should  be  the  same  as 
that  which  exists  between  the  world  of  ideas  and 
the  world  of  phenomena  ;  and  in  the  second  he  was 
clearly  anxious  to  assert  the  absolute  unity  of  the  first 
principle  whilst  retaining  the  triadic  arrangement  of 
the  whole  system.  He  therefore  elevated  The  One 
to  a  position  by  itself,  and  completed  the  trinity  of 
which  Mind  and  Soul  were  members  by  the  addition 
of  Nature.  To  the  modern  mind  this  fantastic  elabo- 
ration of  metaphysical  detail  is  a  mark  of  declining 
power,  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  it  won  for  lambli- 
chus  the  admiration  of  the  philosophers  of  his  day. 
He  is  also  famous  for  the  attention  which  he  paid 
to  incantations  and  other  theurgical  arts.  '  It  may 
however  be  doubted  whether  this  was  not  rather 
characteristic  of  the  age  in  which  he  lived  than  of 
the  man  himself.  lamblichus  appears  to  have  lived 
on  into  the  reign  of  Constantine,  and  to  have  died 
about  the  year  330  A.D. 

A  Neoplatonist  of  a  very  different  stamp  from 
those  who  have  been  described  was  Hierocles2.     He 


1  deol  voepoL,  u7re/)K007«oi, 

2  It  is   customary   among   modern   writers   to   class   Hierocles   of 
Bithynia  with  the  Neoplatonists,  nor  have  I  felt  justified  in  breaking 
through  this  rule.     At  the  same  time  neither  Eusebius,  in  his  reply  to 
Hierocles'    treatise    against    the    Christians,   nor    Lactantius,   appear 
definitely  to  speak  of  him  as  a  Neoplatonist.      His  book  seems  to 


IV]  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  6/ 

was  a  man  of  action  rather  than  a  man  of  thought ; 
and  his  weapons  were  more  frequently  those  of  the 
executioner  than  those  of  the  dialectician.  He  was 
born  in  Caria  about  the  year  275,  and  we  learn  from 
an  inscription  that  he  was  governor  of  Palmyra  under 
Diocletian  and  Maximian.  It  was  perhaps  at  this 
period  that  he  became  acquainted  with  Galerius, 
whom  he  is  said  to  have  urged  to  persecute  the 
Christians.  From  Palmyra  he  was  transferred  to 
Bithynia  in  the  year  304  A.D.,  and  in  the  following 
year  he  was  again  removed  to  Alexandria.  His 
claim  to  be  considered  a  Neoplatonist  indicates  the 
extent  to  which  the  school  had  become  the  recognised 
apologists  of  paganism.  His  one  literary  work,  of 
which  the  name  and  a  few  extracts  have  been  pre- 
served, was  called  "  Plain  words  for  the  Christians," 
in  which,  after  bringing  forward  sundry  difficulties 
and  inconsistencies  in  the  Christian  scriptures,  he 
appears  to  have  compared  the  life  and  miracles  of 
Christ  with  those  of  Apollonius  of  Tyana.  The  book 
itself  is  no  longer  extant,  but  we  possess  a  treatise 
written  in  reply  to  it  by  Eusebius,  who  declares  that 
the  scriptural  difficulties  had  already  been  sufficiently 
answered  by  Origen  in  his  writings  against  Celsus. 
Hierocles  showed  himself  throughout  a  constant 

have  consisted  of  two  parts,  a  series  of  Biblical  questions  similar  to 
those  answered  by  Origen  in  his  writings  against  Celsus,  and  an 
elaborate  attempt  to  show  that  Apollonius,  the  "godlike  man"  of 
paganism,  is  greater  than  Jesus,  the  Christian  God.  Strictly  speaking 
therefore,  Hierocles  should  be  reckoned  a  Neopythagorean,  but  by  the 
beginning  of  the  fourth  century  the  two  schools  had  so  far  amalgamated 
that  we  shall  not  be  far  wrong  in  including  his  name  among  the 
Neoplatonists. 

5—2 


68  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

enemy  of  the  Christians ;  and,  as  governor  of 
Bithynia,  he  became  notorious  for  the  zeal  and 
cruelty  with  which  he  carried  out  Diocletian's  edicts 
for  their  persecution. 

After  the  death  of  lamblichus  there  is  a  gap  in  the 
line  of  great  Neoplatonists.  We  hear  indeed  of  Sopater 
of  Apamea,  who  was  put  to  death  by  Constantine  on 
a  charge  of  employing  magic  to  delay  the  arrival  of 
the  imperial  corn  ships ;  and  the  names  of  Aedesius 
of  Cappadocia,  Maximus  of  Ephesus,  and  Eusebius 
of  Myndus  must  not  be  passed  over  in  silence.  But 
there  is  no  teacher  of  commanding  force  who  stands 
out  pre-eminently  as  the  head  of  the  school. 

iv 

The  next  name  which  arrests  our  attention  is  that 
of  the  Emperor  Julian.  More  perhaps  than  almost 
any  other  character  in  history,  he  has  been  the  victim 
of  circumstance.  We  speak  with  respect  of  Celsus 
and  Porphyry,  recognising  that,  if  they  were  op- 
ponents of  Christianity,  they  were  nevertheless  men 
of  honesty,  who  tried  by  fair  and  open  argument  to 
justify  their  preference  for  the  religion  of  their 
ancestors.  But  of  Julian  it  is  difficult  to  speak  with- 
out adding  the  hateful  surname  of  "The  Apostate," 
and  without  regarding  him  as  a  traitor,  who  perse- 
cuted the  Church  and  tried  to  undo  the  noble  work  of 
Constantine.  What  that  Christianity  was  which  he 
forsook,  and  how  far  he  is  to  be  considered  a  per- 
secutor of  the  Church,  are  questions  which  we  do  not 
often  attempt  to  answer.  The  relation  however  of 
Julian  to  the  Church  will  be  more  properly  considered 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  69 

in  the  next  chapter:  we  are  at  present  concerned  only 
with  his  positive  teaching  as  a  representative  of  the 
Neoplatonic  school. 

As  a  philosopher,  Julian  cannot  indeed  be  placed 
on  the  same  level  as  Plotinus,  but  he  is  to  be  regarded 
as  one  who,  by  example  and  precept,  brought  no 
discredit  on  the  school  of  which  he  was  a  member. 
A  follower  of  lamblichus,  he  exhibits  the  defects  of 
that  section  of  Neoplatonism — a  certain  lack  of  clear- 
ness of  thought  and  a  fondness  for  mysticism.  But  it 
is  an  exaggeration  to  say  that  "  it  is  in  the  Emperor 
Julian  and  his  philosophic  friends  that  Neoplatonism 
goes  down  to  its  nadir1."  Julian  was  neither  a  relent- 
less persecutor  of  the  Church,  like  Hierocles,  nor  was 
he  lost,  like  lamblichus,  in  tedious  elaboration  of  un- 
intelligible speculation.  In  both  of  these  respects 
Julian  stands  on  a  higher  level  than  his  immediate 
predecessors.  He  cleared  away  much  of  the  useless 
detail  with  which  Neoplatonism  had  latterly  been 
encumbered,  and  if  we  remember  the  absolute  power 
which  the  Emperor  possessed,  and  the  hatred  which 
Julian  undoubtedly  felt  against  the  Church,  we  cannot 
but  be  surprised  at  the  moderation  which  he  dis- 
played in  the  matter  of  persecution. 

Turning  to  the  details  of  Julian's  system,  we  notice 
that  he  does  not  explicitly  accept  Plotinus'  trinity  of 
first  principles2.  His  view  of  The  One  is  in  strict 
accordance  with  that  of  Plotinus,  but  he  has  little  to 
say  about  the  other  members  of  the  trinity,  and  the 
relation  in  which  they  stand  to  The  One  and  to  each 

1  Diet.  Christ.  Biog.  art.  "Julian." 

2  Kendall,  The  Emperor  Julian,  pp.  74  ff. 


7O  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

other.  On  the  other  hand  he  is  more  explicit  than 
Plotinus  had  been  upon  the  subordinate  orders  of 
being.  Not  content  with  the  distinction  between  the 
world  of  Ideas  and  the  world  of  phenomena,  he  sub- 
divides the  former  by  contrasting  the  Intelligible  with 
the  Intellectual  (TO  vorjrov  with  TO  voepov),  thus  ob- 
taining three  spheres  of  being  in  place  of  the  trinity 
of  first  principles  which  he  neglects.  He  adopts,  in 
fact,  lamblichus'  teaching  in  its  main  outlines,  but 
simplifies  it  by  omitting  the  constant  repetition 
whereby  lamblichus  had  endeavoured  to  convey  a 
clearer  impression  of  the  transcendental  purity  of  his 
ultimate  principles. 

According  to  Julian,  the  highest  sphere  emanates 
directly  from  The  One,  and  is  occupied  by  the  in- 
telligible gods,  chief  among  whom  is  the  Sun, — not 
the  visible  centre  of  the  solar  system,  but  his  ideal 
counterpart1.  In  addition  to  his  position  as  head  of 
the  intelligible  world,  the  Sun  occupies  the  same 
position  in  reference  to  the  intellectual  and  phe- 
nomenal spheres  which  The  One  holds  with  regard 
to  the  intelligible.  The  place  of  honour  which  Julian 
assigns  to  the  Sun  is  doubtless  due  to  Oriental  in- 
influence ;  and  in  particular  to  that  of  Mithras- 
worship.  This  view  is  corroborated  by  the  confusion 
which  Julian  permits  himself,  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously, to  make  between  the  intelligible  sun  and  the 
phenomenal.  Below  the  intelligible  and  intellectual 
gods  we  reach  the  cosmical  sphere,  wherein  subsist 
the  lowest  order  of  gods,  the  various  daemons,  good 
and  evil,  and  the  visible  world.  Matter  is  regarded 

1  Kendall,  p.  77. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  71 

by  Julian  with  as  much  aversion  as  it  is  by  Plotinus ; 
unless  animated  by  divine  essence  it  cannot  even  be 
apprehended  by  sense,  and  the  union  between  matter 
and  soul  is  brought  about  exclusively  for  the  benefit 
of  the  lower  principle. 

The  system  of  Julian  has  been  described  at 
somewhat  greater  length  than  its  philosophical 
importance  might  seem  to  warrant,  because  it  repre- 
sents the  final  stage  reached  by  Neoplatonism  before 
the  end  of  the  struggle  with  Christianity.  A  century 
and  three  quarters  had  yet  to  elapse  before  Justinian 
closed  the  Neoplatonic  schools :  but  after  the  time  of 
Julian  no  real  effort  was  made  to  re-convert  the  world 
to  paganism.  Neoplatonism  adopted  a  more  academi- 
cal dress :  its  intimate  connexion  with  pagan  myths 
and  pagan  forms  of  worship  was  no  longer  prominent, 
and  it  retired  to  a  position  of  dignified  seclusion,  far 
removed  from  all  questions  of  religious  controversy. 

There  is  another  gap  in  the  history  of  Neoplatonism 
after  the  death  of  Julian.  The  school  was  not  dead, 
for  it  reappears  in  the  early  years  of  the  fifth  century 
both  at  Athens  and  at  Alexandria ;  and  there  is 
moreover  positive  evidence  for  its  persistence  during 
the  interval  at  Rome,  where  St  Augustine  passed 
through  a  period  of  attachment  to  Neoplatonism 
before  his  conversion  and  baptism  in  387  A.D.  But 
it  was  in  a  state  of  suspended  animation.  For  forty 
years  there  was  not  a  single  Neoplatonic  philosopher 
of  the  first  rank,  the  chief  names  of  the  period  being 
those  of  Themistius,  Eunapius,  and  Sallustius  the 
friend  of  Julian.  Themistius  however  is  eminent 
rather  as  a  rhetorician  than  as  a  philosopher,  and  his 


/2  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

speeches,  as  well  as  his  paraphrases  of  Aristotle,  are 
still  extant :  whilst  the  fame  of  Eunapius  rests  not 
upon  his  philosophical  insight  but  upon  the  fact  that 
he  is  the  biographer  of  the  school.  Just  as  the  long 
line  of  Stoics  had  already  been  ended  by  Marcus 
Aurelius,  so  it  would  almost  seem  as  though  Neo- 
platonism  took  half  a  century  to  recover  from  the 
strain  of  assuming  the  purple  in  the  person  of  Julian. 

V 

This  period  of  stagnation  was  followed  by  the 
great  revival  of  Neoplatonism  which  marked  the 
opening  years  of  the  fifth  century.  This  revival  had 
two  centres  of  activity,  in  the  universities  of  Alex- 
andria and  Athens.  It  was  essentially  academical  in 
character,  so  that  the  writings  of  the  last  Neoplatonists 
consist  mainly  of  commentaries  on  the  works  of  Plato 
and  Aristotle.  There  was  a  considerable  amount  of 
inter-communication  between  the  two  universities, 
and  we  find  more  than  one  of  the  philosophers  of 
this  period  connected  with  both. 

Turning  first  to  the  Alexandrian  school  we  are 
confronted  by  two  striking  figures,  both  of  them 
strangely  attractive  and  strangely  different  from  the 
various  philosophers  described  above.  One  is  Synesius, 
the  country  gentleman,  fond  of  his  books  yet  no  less 
fond  of  sport,  ready,  when  need  arose,  to  take  up  the 
arduous  duties  of  a  Christian  Bishop,  and  to  wear  out 
his  life  on  behalf  of  his  people  and  his  country.  The 
other  is  his  teacher,  Hypatia,  perhaps  the  noblest  of 
those  women  of  culture  who  grace  from  time  to  time 
the  pages  of  history,  who  was  brutally  murdered  by 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF    NEOPLATONISM  73 

the  ignorant  mob  of  Alexandria,  the  victim  of  blind 
fanaticism  and  unproved  suspicion. 

Of  the  teaching  of  Hypatia  we  know  but  little  : 
but  it  may  be  gathered  from  the  writings  of  Synesius 
that  she  followed  in  the  steps  of  lamblichus.  With 
regard  however  to  Synesius  we  are  fortunate  in 
having  no  lack  of  materials  from  which  to  form  our 
judgment.  His  philosophy  is  rather  of  the  popular 
type1.  There  is  a  certain  vagueness  in  his  expressions 
which  betrays  the  hand  of  the  dilettante,  a  vagueness 
that  is  especially  noticeable  in  his  Hymns.  In  some 
respects  however  he  rises  far  above  the  Neoplatonism 
of  the  fourth  century.  He  explicitly  rejects  the 
employment  of  theurgical  arts,  and,  even  before  his 
conversion  to  Christianity,  he  has  clearly  little  belief 
in  the  pagan  gods.  The  claim  which  he  made  for 
philosophical  freedom  of  thought,  before  he  permitted 
himself  to  be  consecrated  Bishop  of  Ptolemais,  is  a 
matter  which  will  more  properly  be  discussed  in  the 
next  chapter. 

One  other  member  of  the  Alexandrian  school 
must  be  mentioned  before  we  leave  this  part  of  the 
subject.  This  is  Hierocles,  who  was  a  pupil  of 
Plutarch  at  Athens,  but  who  afterwards  taught  at 
Alexandria.  His  position  is  interesting,  standing  as 
he  does  midway  between  Christianity  and  the  old 
religion2.  He  softens  down  the  harsher  aspects  of 
paganism,  urging  men,  for  example,  to  universal 
charity,  and  pointing  out  the  efficacy  of  prayer.  It  is 
interesting  too  to  notice  that,  in  his  view,  the  belief 

1  Nicol,  Synesius ;  pp.  81  ff. 

2  Cf.  Ueberweg,  vol.  i.  p.  257. 


74  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

in  a  future  state  forms  the  one  argument  for  morality 
in  the  present  life.  Many  of  his  doctrines  are 
identical  with  those  of  Origen, — that,  for  instance,  of 
the  pre-natal  existence  of  the  soul — and  even  where 
he  is  most  distinctively  Neoplatonist,  his  expressions 
are  often  very  near  those  of  the  Alexandrian  Fathers. 
In  his  extant  works  Hierocles  does  not  appear  to 
make  any  direct  reference  to  Christianity,  but  whether 
he  is  to  be  reckoned  as  a  tacit  opponent  of  the  Church, 
is  not  clear. 

The  leader  of  the  Athenian  revival  was  Plutarch 
the  son  of  Nestorius,  whose  pupil  Syrianus  was  the 
teacher  of  the  more  famous  Proclus.  So  far  as  can 
be  judged  from  the  scanty  information  which  we 
possess  about  him,  Plutarch's  philosophy  was  dis- 
tinctly Platonic  in  its  tone1.  He  accepted  the  trinity 
of  Plotinus — The  One,  Mind,  and  Soul — and  moreover 
he  distinguished  the  forms  immanent  in  material 
things  from  matter  itself.  Syrianus  on  the  other 
hand  set  himself  the  task  of  bringing  the  Aristotelian 
and  Platonic  systems  into  harmony.  In  his  view  the 
works  of  Aristotle  must  be  studied  as  a  preparation 
for  those  of  Plato.  The  same  endeavour  to  reconcile 
Plato  with  Aristotle,  and  indeed  to  weld  the  whole  of 
Greek  philosophy  into  one  homogeneous  system, 
occupied  the  energies  of  Proclus.  To  enter  fully  into 
the  details  of  his  teaching  would  be  to  trespass 
beyond  the  proper  limits  of  this  essay,  for  the  direct 
influence  which  the  Athenian  school  exercised  upon 
Christianity  was  but  slight.  An  account  however  of 
Neoplatonism  which  omitted  all  reference  to  the  last 
1  Cf.  Ueberweg,  vol.  i.  pp.  256  ff. 


IV]  THE  HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  75 

great  teacher  of  the  school  would  be  so  manifestly 
incomplete  that  it  will  be  best  to  add  a  few  words  on 
the  system  of  Proclus  as  compared  with  those  of  his 
predecessors. 

According  to  Proclus,  all  that  exists  comes  into 
being  through  a  law  of  "threefold  development1." 
Everything  has  a  state  of  rest  (povrj)  from  which  it 
issues  and  to  which  it  returns  ;  for  everything  is  both 
like  and  unlike  that  from  which  it  is  derived.  By  the 
action  of  these  three,  the  state  of  rest,  the  issuing 
forth,  and  the  return,  the  whole  system  of  the  universe 
is  gradually  developed.  With  Proclus,  as  with  Plo- 
tinus,  the  ultimate  principle  is  The  One,  which  he 
defines  in  language  almost  identical  with  that  of  the 
first  great  Neoplatonic  writer.  From  The  One  how- 
ever proceed  a  number  of  Unities  (evaSes)  which  are 
gods  in  the  highest  sense  of  the  term.  Below  them 
come  the  three  spheres  of  ideal  existence,  for  Proclus, 
not  content  with  the  two  divisions  already  distin- 
guished by  Julian,  speaks  of  the  Intelligible,  the 
Intelligible-Intellectual  (TO  VQ^TQV  a/jua  KOI  voepov), 
and  the  Intellectual  spheres2.  From  the  Intellectual 
sphere  emanates  the  Psychical,  and  below  that  comes 
the  material  world.  In  his  teaching  upon  the  lower 
spheres  of  existence  Proclus  follows  Plotinus ;  but 
in  the  higher  flights  of  his  philosophy  his  system 
becomes  more  intricate  even  than  that  of  lamblichus. 
Proclus  is  said  to  have  laid  the  greatest  stress  upon 
the  proper  performance  of  mystical  ritual,  but  in  his 
extant  works  he  does  not  stand  forward,  like  Julian  or 

1  Ueberweg,  vol.  I.  p.  257 ;  Procl.  Inst.  Theol.  cc.  31—38. 

2  Ueberweg,  vol.  I.  p.  258  ;  Procl.  Plat.  Theol.  3.  14. 


76  THE   HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

the  writer  of  the  De  Mysteriis  as  the  champion  of 
such  observances.  He  saw  that  the  day  for  their 
official  recognition  was  past,  and  he  felt  that  to  call 
public  attention  to  the  subject  would  only  bring  his 
school  into  discredit  and  persecution. 

Proclus  died  in  485  A.D.  and  with  him  the  history 
of  Neoplatonism  practically  closes.  He  was  succeeded 
by  Marinus,  whose  speculations  were  chiefly  concerned 
with  the  theory  of  Ideas  and  with  mathematics.  One 
or  two  other  names  also  deserve  to  be  mentioned, 
such  as  that  of  Simplicius  of  Cilicia,  the  commentator 
on  Aristotle,  and  Boethius,  who,  by  his  treatise  De 
consolatione  philosophiae,  his  translations  from  Aristotle 
and  Porphyry,  and  his  commentaries  on  these  and 
other  philosophical  works,  formed  for  western  scholars . 
their  chief  link  with  Greek  philosophy  until  the 
revival  of  Classical  studies  at  the  time  of  the 
Renaissance 

Neoplatonism  continued  to  be  taught  until  529  A.D. 
when  Justinian  forbade  the  delivery  of  philosophical 
lectures  at  Athens,  and  confiscated  the  property  of 
the  Neoplatonic  school.  The  last  chapter  of  the 
history  is  well  known.  Seven  Neoplatonists,  including 
Simplicius  and  Damascius  the  last  head  of  the  school, 
emigrated  to  Persia,  hoping  to  find  in  the  East  the 
Utopia  which  they  had  sought  in  vain  at  Athens1. 
Sadly  disappointed  they  were  fain  to  return,  and  in 
533  A.D.  they  were  permitted  to  come  back  to  the 
Roman  Empire,  retaining  full  liberty  of  belief,  though 
still  forbidden  to  give  lectures,  or  otherwise  to  pro- 
pagate their  doctrines. 

1  Agath.  Hist.  2.  30;  R.  P.  p.  566. 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  77 


VI 


Whilst  reserving  for  a  later  chapter  all  detailed 
discussion  of  the  relations  between  Neoplatonism  and 
Christianity,  it  will  be  convenient  at  this  point  to  add 
a  few  words  about  the  Christian  writers  who  belong 
to  the  same  period  as  the  various  leaders  of  the 
school.  The  principal  Greek  fathers  contemporary 
with  Plotinus  and  Porphyry  were  Origen,  Gregory 
Thaumaturgus  and  Methodius.  The  importance  for 
our  present  purpose,  of  Origen,  the  pupil  of  Ammonius 
and  the  instructor  of  Porphyry,  can  hardly  be  over- 
rated. His  immense  grasp  of  varied  knowledge,  and 
his  comprehensive  breadth  of  view,  are  illustrated  by 
the  description  which  Gregory  Thaumaturgus  has  left 
of  the  course  of  instruction  which  he  prescribed  for 
his  pupils. 

Origen  and  his  followers  had  much  in  common 
with  the  Neoplatonists.  Methodius,  on  the  other 
hand,  was  entirely  opposed,  both  to  Neoplatonism 
and  to  the  Origenistic  school  of  Christian  speculation. 
He  seems  to  have  been  a  student  of  Plato,  but  he 
imbibed  little  of  his  spirit.  He  wrote  a  lengthy  reply 
to  Porphyry's  attack  on  Christianity,  but  this,  like 
the  work  against  which  it  is  directed,  we  no  longer 
possess.  He  also  wrote  more  than  one  treatise 
against  the  teaching  of  Origen,  notably  against  his 
claim  that  the  Resurrection  of  the  body  cannot  be 
interpreted  in  the  sense  of  a  physical  resurrection. 
For  Origen  himself  we  are  told  that  he  entertained  a 
considerable  respect,  and  the  fragments  of  his  writings 


73  THE   HISTORY   OF    NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

contain  allegorical  interpretations  of  scripture  exactly 
similar  to  those  of  Origen. 

Of  Cyprian  and  Minucius  Felix,  the  contemporary 
Latin  fathers,  little  need  be  said.  In  the  dialogue 
composed  by  Minucius  Felix,  Caecilius,  the  heathen 
representative,  does  not  adopt  a  Neoplatonist  attitude. 
On  the  contrary,  his  endeavour  to  refute  the  doctrine 
of  the  immortality  of  the  soul,  and  to  point  out  the 
greater  durability  of  the  material  world,  is  distinctly 
opposed  to  the  teaching  of  the  school.  Nor  need  we 
linger  over  the  name  of  Cyprian.  There  are  indeed 
traces  of  considerable  philosophical  power  in  his 
writings,  but  he  was  too  much  involved  in  the 
practical  difficulties  connected  with  the  administration 
of  his  See  to  pay  much  attention  to  the  philosophical 
revival  that  was  taking  place  in  the  heathen  world. 
We  pass  on  to  the  great  Christian  father  who,  like 
lamblichus  and  Hierocles,  witnessed  the  persecution 
under  Diocletian  and  the  subsequent  triumph  of 
Christianity.  Born  soon  after  the  year  260  A.D.  and 
living  until  339  A.D.  Eusebius  of  Caesarea  forms  a 
link  between  the  age  of  Plotinus  and  the  age  of  Julian. 
His  position  with  regard  to  Neoplatonism  is  twofold. 
Against  Neoplatonists  as  the  apologists  of  paganism 
the  Christian  Bishop  wages  unceasing  war :  but  with 
Neoplatonism  as  an  abstract  system  of  philosophy 
Eusebius  the  scholar  has  much  sympathy. 

During  the  period  of  the  great  Arian  controversy 
the  Church  was  too  much  distracted  by  her  own 
theological  difficulties  to  pay  much  attention  to 
philosophical  problems  outside  her  pale.  A  literary 
attack  on  Christianity  made  by  Julian  was  answered 


IV]  THE  HISTORY  OF   NEOPLATONISM  79 

in  later  days  by  Cyril  of  Alexandria,  and  there  are 
traces  in  the  writings  of  Athanasius  which  show 'that 
the  indirect  influence  of  Neoplatonism  upon  Alex- 
andrian thought  was  still  considerable. 

In  the  last  three  decades  of  the  fourth  century 
we  find  the  three  Cappadocian  fathers,  Gregory  of 
Nazianzus,  Gregory  of  Nyssa,  and  Basil  of  Caesarea. 
As  followers  of  Origen  they  represent  the  side  of 
Christian  speculation  which  is  most  nearly  allied  to 
Neoplatonism,  and  their  influence  tended  steadily 
towards  the  absorption  by  the  Church  of  Neoplatonic 
doctrines.  To  the  same  period  belongs  Epiphanius, 
who  became  Bishop  of  Constantia  in  Cyprus  in 
367  A.D.  Among  the  Latin  fathers  of  this  generation 
there  are  several  whose  names  ought  to  be  mentioned. 
There  is  Hilary  of  Poictiers  who  is  noticeable  as  one 
of  the  earliest  supporters  of  Origen  in  the  west,  and 
Ambrose,  Bishop  of  Milan,  to  whose  teaching  the 
conversion  of  Augustine  was  largely  due.  Somewhat 
junior  to  Hilary  and  Ambrose,  but  still  belonging  to 
the  same  period,  we  find  Rufinus  the  translator  of 
Origen,  and  the  two  great  theologians  of  Western 
Christendom,  Augustine  and  Jerome.  All  three  lived 
on  into  the  fifth  century,  and  all  of  them  helped  to 
disseminate  the  knowledge  of  Christian  Platonism  in 
the  Western  Church. 

With  the  school  of  Antioch,  whose  golden  age 
falls  in  the  early  years  of  the  fifth  century,  we  are 
not  greatly  concerned.  Diodore  of  Tarsus,  Theodore 
of  Mopsuestia,  John  Chrysostom,  and  Theodoret  hold 
a  place  of  their  own  among  the  Fathers  of  the 
Christian  Church,  but  the  trend  of  their  thought  was 


80  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  [IV 

practical  rather  than  philosophical,  and  they  were  not 
greatly  influenced  by  Neoplatonic  writers.  In  the 
same  period  we  find  Synesius,  Bishop  of  Ptolemais, 
to  whom  reference  has  already  been  made.  One 
other  writer  must  be  mentioned  before  we  close — the 
unknown  writer  who  assumed  the  title  of  '  Dionysius 
the  Areopagite/  It  will  be  sufficient  at  this  point 
to  say  that  these  writings  bear  clear  marks  of  the 
influence  of  Proclus,  and  that  they  appear  to  have 
been  composed  at  the  end  of  the  fifth  century  either 
at  Edessa  or  under  the  influence  of  the  Edessene 
school. 

We  have  now  traced  the  main  outlines  of  the 
history  of  Neoplatonism.  Its  course  might  almost 
be  taken  as  an  illustration  of  the  law  of  triadic 
development  enunciated  by  Proclus.  We  see  it  first 
in  the  hands  of  Plotinus,  far  above  all  controversy, 
extending  indeed  a  distant  recognition  to  the  pagan 
system  then  in  vogue,  but  unfettered  by  the  details, 
whether  of  ritual  or  dogma,  which  that  system 
implied.  We  see  it  next,  issuing  forth  and  differing 
more  and  more  widely  from  its  former  self,  spending 
a  century  in  barren  controversy  and  useless  persecu- 
tion. And  lastly  we  see  the  Return.  Neoplatonism 
desists  from  the  struggle,  and  becomes  once  more  a 
lofty  system  of  abstract  philosophy,  like  its  first  self, 
and  yet  unlike,  in  that  its  energies  are  directed  less 
to  the  perfecting  of  a  system  than  to  the  criticism  and 
exegesis  of  the  masterpieces  of  Plato  and  Aristotle. 
And  thus  its  work  continued,  for  though  the  circle 
directly  affected  by  Neoplatonism  in  its  last  stage 
was  small,  yet  the  influence  exerted  by  the  Athenian 


IV]  THE   HISTORY   OF   NEOPLATONISM  8 1 

school  was  perhaps  in  the  end  more  important  than 
that  of  Neoplatonism  at  any  other  period  of  its 
history.  Plotinus  may  have  affected  the  development 
of  Alexandrian  theology ;  Julian  fought  nobly  for 
the  losing  cause  of  paganism,  but  it  was  left  to 
Boethius  to  store  up  for  future  generations  the 
teaching  of  his  more  famous  predecessors,  and  to 
keep  the  torch  of  philosophy  alight  through  the  dark 
ages  that  were  to  follow. 


E.   N. 


CHAPTER   V 

THE    RELATIONS   BETWEEN    NEOPLATONISM 
AND   CHRISTIANITY 

THE  broad  features  of  the  relations  between  Neo- 

platonism  and  Christianity  have  been  roughly  sketched 

in  the  last  chapter.     There  was  at  first  a  period  of 

apparent   friendship.      Ammonius   may  or  may  not 

have   been    a    Christian   in  his   youth,  but  it  seems 

certain  that  the  Christian  Origen  attended  his  lectures, 

and  moreover  that  the  Neoplatonist  Porphyry  had  at 

one  time  personal  dealings  with  Origen.     This  early 

period  of  alliance  gave  place  to  a  second  period  of 

direct   antagonism.      Porphyry   wrote   an    important 

treatise   against   the   Christians,   and    the   next   two 

generations  saw  Hierocles  the  governor  of  Bithynia 

using  every  means  of  persecution  against  the  Church, 

and  Julian  endeavouring  to  re-establish  paganism  as 

the  dominant  religion  of  the  Empire,  whilst  the  early 

years   of  the   fifth   century  brought   the   murder  of 

Hypatia  at   the   hands  of  the  mob  at   Alexandria. 

But  before  the  end  of  the  fourth  century  there  were 

already   signs   of  returning   friendship   between   the 

philosophers  and  the  theologians.     As  early  as  the 

year  387  St  Augustine  had  passed  through  a  period 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  83 

of  attachment  to  Neoplatonism  before  his  final  con- 
version to  Christianity,  and  if  in  415  Hypatia  was  put 
to  death  by  the  ignorant  fanatics,  her  pupil  Synesius 
had  already  been  elevated  to  the  office  of  a  Christian 
Bishop.  The  period  of  antagonism  was  followed  by 
the  absorption  of  various  Neoplatonic  principles  by 
Christian  writers  such  as  '  Dionysius  the  Areopagite/ 
and  the  vitality  of  these  principles  was  evinced  cen- 
turies later  by  the  appearance  of  a  great  teacher  like 
Joannes  Scotus  (Erigena),  who  drew  his  inspiration 
from  the  study  of  Neoplatonist  writings,  and  whose 
doctrines,  if  audacious,  formed  a  valuable  tonic  to  the 
barren  theology  of  his  day. 

But  it  is  necessary  to  enter  into  a  more  detailed 
discussion  of  the  course  of  these  relations  between 
Neoplatonism  and  Christianity,  and  to  trace,  as  far  as 
is  possible,  in  what  their  mutual  obligations  consisted. 

The  question  has  often  been  discussed,  as  to  the 
amount  of  borrowing  that  took  place  between  the  two 
systems  in  the  early  period,  and  the  answer  given  has 
usually  been  that  little  or  no  direct  borrowing  could 
be  traced,  although  the  indirect  influence  exercised 
by  each  system  upon  the  other  was  probably  con- 
siderable. It  is  necessary  to  investigate  the  nature 
and  the  extent  of  this  indirect  influence,  and  the 
traces,  if  such  there  be,  of  direct  obligations  on  either 
side. 

What  then  are  the  facts  and  probabilities  of  the 
case  ?  There  is  a  general  agreement  among  modern 
writers  that  in  a  certain  sense  the  rise  of  Neoplatonism 
was  the  result  of  the  spread  of  Christianity.  There  is 
no  doubt  whatever  that  from  the  time  of  Porphyry  to 

6—2 


84  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

the  time  of  Julian  one  of  the  chief  objects  of  the 
1  school  was  the  defence  and  maintenance  of  the  old 
'  paganism.  The  question  therefore  that  arises  is  this  : 
was  this  conflict  between  the  philosophers  and  the 
Christian  Church  a  mere  accident,  or  are  we  to  regard 
Neoplatonism  as  being  from  the  outset  an  attempt  to 
j  reform  and  centralise  the  old  religion,  and  to  find 
some  coherent  system  wherewith  to  oppose  the  or- 
ganized advance  of  the  new  faith  ?  If  the  latter  view 
be  correct,  if  we  are  to  view  Neoplatonism  as  a 
deliberate  attempt  to  re-establish  paganism  on  its 
own  merits,  the  early  stage  of  its  history  assumes  a 
new  aspect.  Whatever  the  attitude  of  Christianity 
might  be  towards  Neoplatonism,  Neoplatonism  was 
essentially  opposed  to  Christianity.  But  it  does  not 
therefore  follow  that  it  was  the  best  policy  for  the 
Neoplatonists  to  denounce  their  opponents.  Another 
method  was  open  to  them,  more  diplomatic,  and  from 
their  own  point  of  view,  more  dignified.  Denunciation 
of  the  new  sect,  whether  effective  or  not,  at  least 
implied  its  recognition :  but  to  pass  it  over  in  silence 
was  more  statesmanlike. 

In  support  of  the  view  here  suggested,  that 
Plotinus  by  his  very  silence  was  aiming  a  blow 
against  Christianity,  it  will  be  worth  while  to  ex- 
amine more  closely  a  work  to  which  allusion  has 
already  been  made.  The  Life  of  Apollonius  of  Tyana, 
written  by  Philostratus,  is  an  account  of  an  actual 
man,  the  main  lines  of  whose  history  correspond  with 
the  broad  features  of  this  memoir.  But  the  notes  of 
Damis  of  Nineveh  were  so  transformed  by  Philo- 
stratus that  the  resulting  picture  is  not  that  of  the 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND  CHRISTIANITY  85 

historical  Apollonius  but  of  the  incarnation  of  the 
religious  ideal  of  the  Neopythagorean  circle  by  whom 
the  book  was  published.  In  this  biography  there  is 
no  direct  reference  to  Christianity,  but  as  we  read  the  ^7 
work  of  Philostratus  we  are  again  and  again  struck 
by  its  resemblance  to  the  Christian  Gospels1.  In  the 
first  place  there  is  a  general  similarity  of  outline. 
Apollonius  is  born,  mysteriously,  at  about  the  same 
date  as  Jesus  Christ :  after  a  period  of  retirement  and 
preparation,  in  which  he  shows  a  marvellous  religious 
precocity,  we  find  a  period  of  public  ministry  followed 
by  a  persecution  which  corresponds  in  some  sense  to 
our  Lord's  Passion ;  a  species  of  resurrection,  and  an 
ascension. 

There  are  also  numerous  analogies  in  detail. 
Apollo's  messengers  sing  at  the  birth  of  Apollonius, 
just  as  the  angels  at  Bethlehem  hymned  the  birth  of 
Christ.  Apollonius  too  has  from  the  first  numerous 
enemies  who  are  nevertheless  unable  to  harm  him  : 
he  is  followed  by  a  chosen  band  of  disciples  in  whose 
ranks  we  find  disaffection  and  even  treason.  He  sets 
his  face  steadily  to  go  to  Rome  in  spite  of  the  warn- 
ings of  his  friends  that  the  Emperor  is  seeking  to  kill 
him.  He  is  set  at  nought  by  the  servants  of  Nero, 
just  as  Jesus  was  mocked  by  Herod's  soldiers.  He  is 
accused  of  performing  his  miracles  by  magic  and 
illegal  means — a  charge  precisely  similar  to  that 
brought  against  Christ.  Like  our  Lord,  too,  Apol- 
lonius is  represented  as  having  constantly  driven  out 
•  daemons  by  his  mere  word.  It  is  even  possible  to 
-compare  individual  miracles  on  either  side.  A  parallel 

1  Reville,  La  Religion  d  Rome  sous  les  Sevtres,  pp.  227  ff. 


86  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

to  the  devils  who  entered  into  the  herd  of  swine  is  to 
be  traced  in  the  story  of  a  demoniac  at  Athens,  whose 
evil  spirit  enters  into  a  statue  which  it  overthrows,, 
and  at  Rome  there  is  a  resuscitation  of  a  dead  child 
which  is  strangely  similar  to  the  raising  of  Jairus* 
daughter.  Apollonius  too  appears  miraculously  to 
certain  followers  after  his  departure  from  earth,  and 
is  clearly  represented  as  being  then  free  from  the 
limitations  of  material  existence. 

Nor  are  the  analogies  confined  to  the  Gospels. 
Just  as  Jesus  appeared  to  Saul  on  the  way  to 
Damascus,  Apollonius  appears  miraculously  to  a 
declared  adversary  whom  he  converts.  Like  St 
Peter,  or  St  Paul  at  Philippi,  he  breaks  his  bonds, 
and  like  the  disciples  at  Pentecost  he  has  the  gift 
of  tongues. 

There  is  of  course  a  danger  of  pressing  these 
analogies  too  far :  indeed  there  are  probably  several 
cases  in  which  parallels  could  be  adduced  from  sources, 
that  are  admittedly  free  from  all  connexion  with  the 
Gospels1.  But  the  collective  weight  of  the  whole 
series  is  considerable,  and  it  is  difficult  to  believe 
that  the  similarity  is  not  due  to  conscious  imitation. 
Now  it  has  already  been  noted  that  throughout  the 
whole  of  Philostratus'  work  there  is  no  direct  reference 
to  Christianity,  and  this  too  can  hardly  have  been 
accidental.  Is  it  then  unreasonable  to  suppose  that 
in  the  brilliant  circle  which  gathered  round  the 
Empress  Julia  Domna  there  were  men  capable  of 
devising  an  attempt  to  cut  away  the  ground  beneath 
the  feet  of  the  Christians,  by  re-writing  the  Christian 

1  Reville,  p.  230. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  8/ 

gospel  in  the  support  of  paganism,  without  acknow- 
ledgment and  without  any  show  of  controversy  ? 

The  advantage  of  such  a  device  is  obvious.  A 
work  that  claimed  to  be  historical  would  gain  access 
in  quarters  where  a  controversial  treatise  would  be 
debarred.  It  might  be  possible  to  gain  for  Apol- 
lonius  some  share  of  reverence  even  among  the 
Christians  themselves.  And  if  this  were  the  editors' 
aim  the  absence  of  all  reference  to  Jesus  Christ 
becomes  not  only  possible  but  natural.  To  mention 
Him  with  reverence  would  not  suit  their  purpose ;  to 
introduce  Him  as  coming  into  conflict  with  Apollonius 
and  as  being  by  him  vanquished,  whether  in  argument 
or  in  wonder  working,  must  inevitably  rouse  the  sus- 
picions of  those  very  persons  whose  antagonism  they 
were  most  anxious  not  to  excite. 

They  accordingly  produced  an  account  of  a  man 
whose  existence  no  one  could  question,  and  whose 
character  they  portrayed  in  colours  so  attractive  as  to 
gain  a  measure  of  approbation  even  from  their  oppo- 
nents. Round  his  name  they  grouped  a  series  of 
incidents,  copied  from  the  Christian  Gospels,  but  with 
sufficient  alteration  to  escape  the  charge  of  direct 
plagiarism.  By  this  means  they  hoped  to  secure  the 
allegiance  of  many  who  admired  the  Christian  faith, 
but  whose  conservatism  made  them  anxious  to  cling 
to  the  old  religion,  if  only  it  could  be  shown  to  hold 
its  own  against  the  attacks  of  its  opponent.  The  lack 
of  all  scientific  criticism  in  the  modern  sense,  among 
pagans  and  Christians  alike,  secured  them  from  de- 
tection. The  list  of  authorities  quoted  by  Philostratus 
would  more  than  suffice  for  the  acceptance  of  all  the 


88  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

miracles  here  recorded  :  and,  without  making  their 
intention  too  obvious,  it  was  possible  for  them  to  place 
in  the  mouth  of  Apollonius  discourses  which  tended 
steadily  to  the  advancement  of  pagan  conservatism 
and  pagan  tolerance  as  opposed  to  the  revolutionary 
and  bigoted  teaching  of  Christianity. 

In  confirmation  of  the  view  here  expressed  it  may 
be  added,  that  whether  or  no  it  was  so  intended  by 
the  authors,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  later  apolo- 
gists of  paganism  did  make  use  of  the  Life  of 
Apollonius  in  the  way  that  has  been  described. 
Thus  in  his  Plain  words  for  the  Christians  we  find 
Hierocles  of  Bithynia  giving  a  catalogue  of  the 
miracles  of  Apollonius,  and  then  proceeding  "Why 
then  have  I  mentioned  these  events?  It  is  in  order 
that  the  reader  may  compare  our  reasoned  and 
weighty  judgment  of  each  detail  with  the  vapourings 
of  the  Christians.  For  we  speak  of  him  who  has 
wrought  all  these  things,  not  as  God,  but  as  a  man 
divinely  gifted  ;  but  they,  for  the  sake  of  a  few  paltry 
miracles,  do  not  hesitate  to  call  their  Jesus  God1.'" 

The  revival  promoted  by  Julia  Domna  was  not 
altogether  successful.  But  the  spirit  which  prompted 
it  survived  and  reappeared  nearly  half  a  century  later. 
The  silence  of  Plostirms^upon  the  subject  of  Chris- 
tianity is  difficult  to  explain  until  we  see  that  it  is 
deliberate  and  intentional.  In  the  whole  of  his  pub- 
lished writings — for  Porphyry  makes  it  clear  that  he 
collected  and  edited  all  that  he  was  able  to  find — 
Christianity  is  not  once  mentioned  by  name,  and  the 
most  careful  search  has  produced  hardly  a  single 

1  Quoted  by  Eus.  c.  Hieroc.  c.  2  ;  Migne,  iv.  797. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  89 

instance  even  of  indirect  reference1.  It  is  scarcely 
possible  to  ascribe  this  silence  to  ignorance  :  Plotinus 
was  hardly  in  his  grave  before  Porphyry  published  an 
attack  upon  the  Church  based  upon  a  careful  study  of 
Christian  writings  and  practices,  and  it  is  moreover 
difficult  to  suppose  that  he  was  entirely  unacquainted 
with  the  works  of  Origen,  who  had  been  like  himself 
a  pupil  of  Ammonius  Saccas.  Nor  can  we  set  his 
silence  down  to  an  idea  that  the  Christians  were  not 
worthy  of  his  criticism.  If  he  condescended  to  write 
a  treatise  against  the  Gnostics2,  why  did  he  not  deign 
to  spend  a  passing  thought  upon  the  larger  and  more 
important  body  of  orthodox  Christians  ? 

The  very  fact  that  direct  reference  to  Christianity 
can  nowhere  be  found,  although  its  indirect  influence 
seems  to  be  distinctly  traceable  in  Plotinus'  system, 
points  towards  intentional  concealment  of  his  obliga- 
tions on  the  part  of  the  writer.  Indeed,  it  may  even 
be  said  that  Plotinus  is  specially  careful  to  avoid 
using  Christian  terminology  where  he  approaches  most 
nearly  to  Qifistian  doctrines.  Thus  it  is  difficult  to 
believe  that  Plotinus'  doctrine  of  Mind  (1/01)9)  is  not 
connected  with  Philo's  speculations  on  the  Word 
(\0709).  In  both  alike  we  find  the  distinctive  theory 
that  the  Platonic  Ideas,  in  accordance  with  which 

1  In  his  book  upon  Neoplatonism,   p.  83,    Mr   Whittaker  quotes 
Enn.  i.  8.  5  as  "one  of  the  two  or  three  very  slight  possible  allusions 
in  the  Enneads  to  orthodox  Christianity." 

2  Prof.  Bigg  in  his  Bampton  Lectures,  p.  30,  speaks  of  those  against 
whom  Plotinus  wrote  as  "purely  heathen  Gnostics."     They  are,  how- 
ever, distinctly  classed  with  the  Christians  by  Porphyry  (Vil.  Plot.  c.  16) 
and  it  may  be  assumed  that  Plotinus  himself  placed  them  in  the  same 
category.     For  the  purposes  of  my  argument  the  point  of  importance 
lies  not  in  what  they  were,  but  in  what  Plotinus  supposed  them  to  be. 


9O  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

the  visible  world  was  formed,  are  contained  in  this 
principle.  Yet  Plotinus  studiously  avoids  using  the 
term  Logos  as  the  title  of  the  second  principle  of 
his  trinity.  Now  it  is  not  easy  to  see  why  Plotinus, 
whilst  using  Philo's  doctrine  should  thus  avoid  Philo's 
terminology,  unless  he  had  some  reason  for  so  doing : 
and  the  simplest  explanation  is  that  the  word  Logos 
had  in  his  view  been  so  contaminated  by  Christian 
associations  that  he  preferred  to  avoid  it  altogether, 
and  to  go  back  to  the  term  of  the  old  Greek  philo- 
sophy. His  practice  throughout  suggests  that  the 
adoption  by  the  school  of  the  position  of  apologists 
for  the  old  religion  was  not  a  later  development,  but 
an  essential  characteristic  of  Neoplatonism.  The 
method  changed  as  time  went  on.  Plotinus  en- 
deavoured to  secure  his  aim  by  haughtily  ignoring 
the  Christians:  Porphyry  condescended  to  make  a 
literary  attack  upon  them  :  Hierocles  would  not  trust 
to  literary  weapons  alone,  and  supplemented  the  pen 
with  the  sword  :  but  the  attitude  of  the  school  re- 
mained the  same  throughout. 

If  this  view  be  correct:  if  Neoplatonism  was  from 
the  first  an  endeavour  to  justify  on  its  own  merits  the 
existence  and  the  supremacy  of  the  old  system,  it  is 
not  surprising  that  the  search  for  the  direct  use  of 
Christian  doctrines  by  the  Neoplatonists  has  been  pro- 
ductive of  such  very  scanty  results.  They  naturally 
preferred  not  to  parade  any  obligations  to  their 
opponents  under  which  they  might  labour :  they 
sought  out  from  earlier  systems  of  philosophy  those 
elements  which  were  in  keeping  with  the  spirit  of 
their  day,  and  carefully  concealed  the  principles  upon 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND   CHRISTIANITY  QI 

which  their  selection  was  based.  Just  as  Philostratus 
and  Julia  Domna  had  corrected  and  improved  the 
Gospel  story,  so  Plotinus  edited  and  retouched  Chris- 
tian theology  in  the  light  of  Platonic  philosophy. 


It  is  then  hardly  surprising  that  we  can  find  no 
reference  to  Christianity  in  the  writings  of  Plotinus. 
But  if  we  attack  the  problem  from  the  other  side, 
and  seek  to  discover  traces  of  the  use  of  Neoplatonism 
by  Christian  writers,  it  is  possible  that  better  results 
may  be  found.  The  third  century  was  a  period  in 
which  Christian  speculation  was  unusually  free,  and 
the  great  Alexandrine  Fathers  had  no  hesitation 
about  turning  to  Christian  use  the  resources  of  pagan 
philosophy.  We  have  already  remarked  the  free  use 
which  Clement  of  Alexandria  makes  of  the  writings 
of  Plato  and  Philo :  let  us  now  compare  the  positions 
of  Plotinus  and  Origen.  In  both  alike  we  see  an 
attempt  to  reach  a  plane  of  philosophical  agreement 
above  all  religious  controversy,  far  removed  from  all 
superstition  and  ritualism,  be  it  Christian  or  pagan. 
Yet  their  attitudes  are  perfectly  distinct.  Origen, 
when  pressed,  is  essentially  a  Christian.  He  accepts  ' 
with  the  fullest  reverence  the  Christian  scriptures.  If 
he  pleads  for  freedom  to  indulge  in  mystical  specula- 
tion, he  is  ready  to  acknowledge  the  claim  of  the 
ordinary  man  to  be  as  truly  a  member  of  Christ's 
Church  as  himself;  moreover,  as  a  theologian,  he 
does  not  often  permit  his  philosophy  to  appear. 
Plotinus  on  the  other  hand  is  essentially  a  philo- 
sopher writing  to  philosophers.  The  audience  to 


92  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

whom  he  speaks  is  small  and  select :  in  the  ordinary 
man  he  takes  no  interest  whatever.  Religion  in  the 
popular  sense  is  a  subject  which  he  avoids:  "the/ 
gods  must  come  to  me,  not  I  to  them,"  was  his  reply 
when  Amelius  invited  him  to  accompany  him  to  a\ 
sacrificial  feast1,  and  it  exactly  expressed  his  attitude  • 
to  the  popular  system.  He  had  no  great  love  for 
polytheism,  but  he  thought  it  the  most  convenient 
system  for  the  mass  of  mankind,  and  endeavoured  to 
point  out  a  philosophical  basis  upon  which  it  might 
be  supposed  to  rest. 

Turning  now  to  a  more  detailed  comparison  of 
the  doctrines  of  Plotinus  and  Origen,  we  notice  in 
the  first  place  that  a  considerable  mass  of  teaching 
was  common  to  them  both.  The  main  features  of 
this  common  teaching,  together  with  the  doctrines 
added  thereto  in  Christian  theology,  are  admirably 
summarized  in  the  Confessions  of  St  Augustine2/ 
Writing  about  the  Neoplatonist  books  of  which  he 
was  at  one  time  a  student,  he  tells  us  that  he  found 
in  them,  not  indeed  the  words,  but  the  substance  of 
much  of  the  Christology  of  St  Paul  and  St  John, 
with,  however,  serious  gaps.  The  great  eternal 
verities  described  in  the  opening  verses  of  St  John's 
Gospel  he  found  set  forth  by  the  Neoplatonists,  but 
all  that  brings  the  Christian  into  close  personal  con- 
k  tact  with  the  Eternal  Son  of  God  was  omitted. 

"  For  that  before  all  time  and  above  all  time  Thy 
Only-begotten  Son  abideth  unchangeable  and  co- 
eternal  with  Thee,  and  that  of  His  fulness  all  souls 
receive,  in  order  that  they  may  be  blessed,  and  that 

1  Porph.  Vit.  Plot.  ro.  2  Aug.  Conf.  7.  9. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  93 

by  participation  of  Thy  eternal  wisdom  they  may  be 
renewed  in  order  that  they  may  be  wise, — this  is 
there.  But  that  in  due  time  He  died  for  the  ungodly: 
that  Thou  sparedst  not  Thy  only  Son,  but  deliveredst 
Him  up  for  all, — this  is  not  there1." 

It  is  much  the  same  with  the  other  great  articles 
of  the  Christian  faith.  The  Unity  and  the  Goodness 
of  God,  and  even  in  some  sense  the  three  Persons  of 
the  Holy  Trinity  are  doctrines  upon  which  the  Neo- 
platonist,  no  less  than  the  Christian  theologian,  lays 
much  emphasis.  But  the  love  of  a  heavenly  Father 
for  His  children,  and  the  idea  that  the  very  highest 
of  all  Beings  could  be  approached  by  the  humblest  of 
mankind,  are  thoughts  which  we  find  in  Christian 
writers  alone. 

In  addition  to  this  partial  identity  of  teaching, 
there  was  some  similarity  in  the  methods  employed 
by  Origen  and  the  Neoplatonists.  For  example, 
Origen  was  at  one,  if  not  with  Plotinus  himself,  at 
least  with  the  general  practice  of  the  school,  in 
attaching  the  highest  importance  to  the  allegorical 
method  of  interpretation.  The  use  of  allegorical 
interpretation  was  not  new.  It  had  been  employed 
by  many  earlier  writers,  pagan,  Jewish,  and  Christian 
alike,  and  it  arose,  not  from  the  particular  tenets  of 
any  one  school,  but  from  the  difficulty  which  in- 
evitably arises,  when  books  written  in  one  period 
and  at  one  stage  of  civilisation  come  to  be  accepted 
as  sacred,  and  invested  with  special  reverence  by  later 
generations  whose  civilisation  is  more  advanced. 

But  although  the  mystical  method  of  interpreta- 

1  Aug.  Conf.  7.  9.  3,  trans.  Bigg. 


94  THE  RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

tion  was  not  peculiar  either  to  Christianity  or  to 
(Neoplatonism,  the  extent  to  which  it  was  employed 
by  both  alike  calls  for  at  least  a  passing  reference. 
The  difficulty  mentioned  above  was  felt  severely  by 
the  early  Christians.  They  had  adopted  the  Old 
Testament  in  its  entirety:  they  gloried  in  the  link 
thus  obtained  with  an  almost  prehistoric  antiquity : 
but  they  found  themselves  in  consequence  confronted 
with  difficulties  which  their  enemies  were  not  slow  to 
turn  to  account.  If  the  Old  Testament  was  the  Word 
of  God,  why  did  the  Christians  set  aside  the  whole  of 

1  the  sacrificial  enactments  of  the  Law  ?  If  God,  in 
the  Old  Testament,  be  a  Being  Whose  attributes  are 

*  Justice,  Mercy,  and  Goodness,  what  explanation  can 
be  given  of  such  texts  as  "  I  the  Lord  thy  God  am  a 
jealous  God,  visiting  the  iniquities  of  the  fathers  upon 

,  the  children,  unto  the  third  and  fourth  generation  " ; 
or  again,  "  There  is  no  evil  in  the  city  which  the  Lord 
hath  not  done1?" 

In   the   same   manner,   educated    heathens   were 

v  brought  face  to  face  with  problems  of  a  similar  kind. 
If  the  various  local  divinities  were  all  different  mani- 
festations of  the  same  God,  or  members  of  a  vast 
host,  who  all  owned  one  supreme  deity  as  their  Lord 
and  Master,  how  was  it  that  Homer  described  the  Gods 
as  quarrelling  and  even  fighting  one  with  another  ? 
The  time  had  not  yet  come  either  for  the  Christian 

'  to  speak  of  a  "progressive  revelation,"  or  for  the 
heathen  to  work  out  a  theory  of  the  evolution  of  a 
gradually  deepening  conception  of  the  deity.  Ac- 
cordingly, both  alike  took  refuge  in  the  allegorical 

1  Ex.  20.  5 ;  Amos  3.  6;  Orig.  Philoc.  i.  8. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  95 

method  of  interpretation,  and,  once  introduced,  both 
alike  employed  it  freely,  even  in  cases  where  there 
was  no  difficulty  to  be  solved.  If  Origen's  explana- 
tion of  the  water-pots  at  Cana1  appears  to  us.  to  be 
far-fetched  and  unnecessary,  Porphyry's  account  of 
the  Nymph's  Grotto  affords  a  parallel  instance  on  the 
other  side. 

But  the  resemblance  between  Plotinus  and  Origen 
is  not  limited  to  their  general  similarity  of  standpoint 
or  of  method.  Definite  points  of  contact,  which  may 
be  grouped  in  three  classes,  are  to  be  traced  in  the 
positive  teaching  of  both  alike.  In  the  first  class  we  )  \ 
may  place  the  doctrines  which  are  not  specially 
characteristic  of  the  teaching  of  either  Origen  or 
Plotinus,  the  retention  of  which  serves  only  to  in-  - 
crease  the  general  similarity  between  the  two  systems. 
In  the  second  class  may  be  placed  those  instances  in 
which  there  is  real  harmony  between  them  on  points  . 
of  importance,  whilst  the  third  class  contains  cases  in 
which  it  would  appear  that  the  teaching  of  Origen, 
without  being  identical  with  that  of  Plotinus,  has 
been  distinctly  influenced  by  Neoplatonic  theories. 
We  cannot  here  do  more  than  refer  to  one  or  two 
examples  of  each  class,  but  the  question  is  one  that 
deserves  more  attention  and  more  detailed  study  than 
it  has  hitherto  received. 

An  example  of  the  first  group  may  be  found  in 
the  view,  taken  by  both    alike,  that   the   stars    are  ' 
living    beings   possessed    of   souls2.      Strange   as   it 

1  Philocalia,  i.  12. 

2  Whittaker,  p.   74;   Plot.    Enn.   4.   4.    22;    Westcott,    Religious 
Thought  in  the   West,  p.  229;    Origen,   De  Princ.   i.   7.  3,    Comm. 
in  Joh.  t.   2,  c.  17. 


96  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

sounds  to  modern  ears,  this  doctrine  was  by  no 
means  new,  and  as  his  authority  for  its  truth  Origen 
refers,  not  to  Greek  philosophy  nor  even  to  Philo, 
but  di/ect  to  the  Old  Testament1.  Instances  of  this 
kind  are  perhaps  of  small  individual  importance,  but 
they  increase  the  bulk  of  teaching  common  to  both 
systems — a  point  that  must  not  be  lost  sight  of,  if 
we  are  to  gain  an  adequate  conception  of  the  relations 
between  them. 

More  important  however  is  the  second  class,  of 
which  two  or  three  examples  may  be  quoted.  The 
pre-natal  existence  of  the  soul  is  a  doctrine  which 
Origen2  may  have  derived  either  from  Greek  or  from 
Jewish  sources :  it  is  even  possible  to  quote  the  New 
Testament  in  support  of  it3.  But  the  theory  of  the 
transmigration  of  souls  is  one  of  those  bolder  flights 
of  imagination  which  are  so  characteristic  of  Origen4 
and  it  is  moreover  in  the  fullest  harmony  with  Neo- 
platonic  thought.  We  may  however  observe  that 
wheileas  Plotinus5,  in  a  section  that  recalls  the  famous 
passage  in  Plato's  Republic*,  accepts  the  possibility 
of  human  souls  passing  into  the  bodies  of  lower 
animals, 

^  Origen  explicitly  denies  that  such  a  thing  is 
conceivable7.  It  may  be  added  that  in  later  years 
Proclus  adopts  the  same  position  as  the  Christian 
Fathers,  and  interprets  the  story  of  Er  the  Armenian 
allegorically. 

1  Jer.  7.  18;  Job  25.  5.  2  Comm.  injoh.  i.  2,  c.  30. 

3  S.  John  9.  2. 

4  Westcott,  R.  T.  W.  p.  228;  Orig.  De  Princ.  i.  6.  2,  3. 

5  Whittaker,  p.  96.  6  Enn.  3.  4.  2. 
7  De  Princ.  i.  8.  4. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  97 

Another  instance  of  the  same  kind  is  to  be  found 
in  the  view  held  by  Origen  that  evil  is  non-being.  In 
his  exposition  of  the  third  verse  of  St  John's  Gospel1, 
he  endeavours  to  support  his  interpretation  by 
adducing  a  number  of  passages  from  both  the  Old 
and  the  New  Testament :  but  it  is  obvious  that  the 
conception  of  evil  as  "  that  which  is  not "  is  derived, 
not  from  Scripture,  but  from  philosophy.  Origen  is 
careful  however  to  stop  short  of  the  view  that  "that 
which  is  not "  is  identical  with  matter,  or  of  allowing 
his  philosophy  to  carry  him  into  any  form  of  Gnosticism. 

The  third  group  is  perhaps  the  most  interesting  of 
all.  We  have  here  to  deal,  not  with  direct  imitation 
or  adoption  of  Neoplatonic  theories,  but  with  their 
indirect  influence  upon  doctrines  essentially  Christian, 
and  to  point  out  how  far  this  influence  tended  to 
prevent  the  Christian  teaching,  and  how  far  it  served 
to  bring  out  more  fully  its  deeper  meaning. 

There  is  in  Origen's  commentary  on  St  John's 
Gospel  a  passage  so  remarkable  as  to  be  worth 
inserting  in  full2.  Speaking  of  the  relation  between 
the  Son  and  the  Holy  Spirit,  Origen  says  "  Perhaps 
we  may  say  even  this,  that  in  order  to  be  freed  from 
the  bondage  of  corruption,  the  creation,  and  especially 
the  race  of  men,  needed  the  incarnation  of  a  blessed 
and  divine  Power  which  should  reform  all  that  was  on 
the  earth  :  and  that  this  duty  fell,  as  it  were,  to  the 
Holy  Spirit.  But  being  unable  to  undertake  it,  He 
made  the  Saviour  His  substitute,  as  being  alone  able 
to  endure  so  great  a  struggle.  And  so,  while  the 

1  Comm.  injoh.  t.  2,  c.  13;  cf.  Plot.  Enn.  \.  8.  7. 

2  torn.  2,  cap.  n. 

E.  N.  7 


98  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

Father,  as  Supreme,  sends  the  Son,  the  Holy  Spirit 
joins  in  sending  Him  and  in  speeding  Him  on  His  way  : 
promising  in  due  time  to  descend  upon  the  Son  of  God, 
and  to  co-operate  with  Him  in  the  salvation  of  man- 
kind." 

The  boldness  of  this  conception  is  astounding,  and 
it  is  clear  that  no  orthodox  writer  could  have  ventured 
a  century  and  a  half  later  to  declare  one  Person  of 
the  Holy  Trinity  to  be  thus  inferior  to  another.  For 
it  is  to  be  noticed  that  although  the  Holy  Spirit  joins 
in  sending  the  Son  and  in  speeding  Him  on  His  way, 
He  does  so  in  consequence  of  His  own  inability  to 
perform  the  office  which  had  fallen  to  Him.  We  are 
not  however  now  concerned  with  the  orthodoxy  of 
Origen's  view,  but  with  the  source  from  which  it  is 
derived,  and  if  we  admit  that  "  Origen  was  deeply 
influenced  by  the  new  philosophy,  which  seemed  to  him 
to  unveil  fresh  depths  in  the  Bible1/'  the  answer  to  this 
question  is  not  far  to  seek.  In  the  Neoplatonic  trinity 
the  difference  between  Mind  and  Soul  is  accentuated  by 
the  fact  that  the  latter  has  elected  to  become  united 
with  the  world  of  phenomena2.  Such  union  could 
not  but  incapacitate  soul  for  the  work  of  redemption, 
since  it  is  clear  that  the  redeemer  must  be  free  from 
the  defects  and  limitations  of  that  which  he  redeems. 

If  this  explanation  be  correct,  the  case  is  one  in 
which  Origen  was  led  by  his  Neoplatonist  tendencies 
into  something  very  like  heresy.  But  the  passage  passed 
unnoticed.  The  need  for  defining  the  relations  between 
the  Persons  of  the  Holy  Trinity  was  not  yet  felt,  and 
more  than  a  century  had  still  to  elapse  before  the 
doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit  attracted  much  attention. 

1  Westcott,  ^.  T.  W.  p.  208.  2  Enn.  5.  i.  6. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  99 

It  is  only  fair  to  add  another  instance,  in  which 
Origen's  view,  fiercely  opposed  during  his  lifetime 
and  for  many  years  after  his  death,  is  nevertheless 
in  complete  agreement  with  modern  thought. 

To  the  Christian  and  to  the  Neoplatonist  alike, 
the  consummation  of  man's  existence  is  ultimately  to 
be  found  in  assimilation  to  God.  It  is  true  that  this 
is  not  a  doctrine  which  was  borrowed  by  the  Church 
from  the  Neoplatonists :  on  the  contrary  it  is  possible 
that  Neoplatonism  was  in  this  matter  affected  by 
Christian  influences.  But  the  form  in  which  it  was 
cast  by  Origen  may  be  in  part  due  to  Neoplatonism1. 
Thus  we  notice  the  earnest  protest  which  Origen 
makes  against  the  extremely  literal  interpretation 
current  in  his  day  of  the  doctrine  of  the  Resurrection 
of  the  Body2.  There  will  be,  he  says,  a  resurrection 
body,  for  incorporeity  is  the  prerogative  of  God  alone, 
but  we  have  St  Paul's  authority  for  saying  that  it  will 
differ  from  our  present  body  alike  in  form  and  in 
composition  as  widely  as  the  full  grown  plant  differs 
from  the  seed.  And  this  conception  of  a  body, 
differing  indeed  from  that  which  we  now  possess  but 
united  to  it  by  the  continuance  of  personality,  he 
fortifies  by  a  reference  to  the  Many  Mansions  in  our 
Father's  House3.  These  are,  he  maintains,  a  number 
of  resting  places  in  a  continual  upward  progress,  each 
of  which  throws  a  flood  of  light  upon  the  stage 
through  which  the  soul  has  passed,  and  opens  up  a 
new  vision  of  greater  mysteries  beyond.  So  we  are 
led  on  to  Resurrection,  Judgment,  Retribution  and 

1  Grig.  De  Princ.  2.  n.  6.  2  Fragment,  De  Res.  Carnis. 

3  St  John  14.  2. 

7—2 


IOO  THE    RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

final  Blessedness,  each  of  which  Origen  describes  in 
careful  accordance  with  the  words  of  Scripture. 
Thus  the  Resurrection  body,  instead  of  being  gross 
and  material,  will  be  of  fine  incorruptible  texture, 
whilst  the  complete  identity  of  each  person  will 
be  preserved.  Judgment  and  Retribution  are  not 
arbitrary  acts  of  a  capricious  tyrant  but  the  unimpeded 
action  of  divine  law  and  the  just  severity  of  a  righteous 
king ;  and  the  final  Blessedness  so  far  from  being  a 
state  of  indolent  repose  will  be  a  vision  of  divine 
glory,  with  an  ever  growing  insight  into  the  infinite 
mysteries  of  the  divine  counsels. 

It  is  true  that  there  is  no  Neoplatonic  doctrine 
that  Origen  can  here  be  said  to  have  adopted,  and  in 
some  particulars  he  is  following  in  the  steps  of  Clement 
of  Alexandria.  Yet  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  his 
insight  is  wholly  unconnected  with  the  teaching  of 
Plotinus,  that  "  the  soul  aspires  to  freedom  from  the 
trammels  of  matter,  and  that  rising  ever  to  higher 
purity  it  ultimately  comes  to  nothing  else  except 
itself;  and  thus,  not  being  in  any  thing  else,  it  is  in 
nothing  save  in  itself1."  In  this  way,  untrammelled  by 
Neoplatonic  dogmas,  yet  filled  with  the  spirit  of 
reverent  speculation  which  prompted  them,  Origen 
has  succeeded,  "  by  keeping  strictly  to  the  Apostolic 
language,  in  anticipating  results  which  we  have 
hardly  yet  secured2."  In  truth  it  was  by  no  mere 
accident  that  Justinian,  who  closed  the  Neoplatonic 
school  at  Athens,  was  also  the  Emperor  who  procured 
a  formal  condemnation  of  Origen3. 

1  Enn.  6.  9.  1 1 .  2  Westcott,  R.  T.  W.  p.  244. 

3   Ib.  p.    22-2. 


V]  NEOPLATONTSM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  IOI 

ii 

We  cannot  however  linger  over  this  early  period 
of  alliance,  but  must  pass  on  to  the  period  of  direct 
antagonism,  inaugurated  by  Porphyry  and  closed  by 
Julian.  The  struggle  thus  occupied  almost  a  century, 
and  the  plan  of  campaign  was  not  always  the  same. 
Each  of  the  great  Neoplatonist  leaders,  Porphyry 
and  lamblichus,  Hierocles  and  Julian,  had  his  own 
characteristic  method  of  dealing  with  the  problem, 
and  it  is  our  task  to  describe  what  these  methods 
were,  and  what  the  resulting  attitude  of  contemporary 
Christian  writers. 

The  attitude  of  Porphyry,alike  towards  Christianity 
and  towards  the  popular  religion,  has  already  been 
described,  together  with  the  treatise  in  which  the 
supporters  of  pagan  ritual  defended  their  position. 
It  will  be  well  to  remember  that  much  of  the  language 
there  applied  to  pagan  divinities  and  pagan  ceremonies 
might  with  slight  modifications  be  employed  with 
reference  to  the  more  mystical  side  of  Christianity. 
Thus  Origen,  in  his  Commentary  on  St  Johns  Gospel^ 
had  already  said  that  we  must  rise  from  practical  to 
theoretical  theology1,  and  he  had  moreover  in  other 
points  anticipated  the  writer  of  the  De  Mysteriis.  He 
speaks  of  the  Unity  of  God  and  the  diversity  of  His 
powers,  and  adduces  scriptural  proofs  for  the  existence, 
below  God,  of  gods,  thrones,  "  Sabai "  and  the  like2. 
In  the  second  book  of  his  Commentary  he  elaborates 
his  system  yet  further3.  The  highest  being  is  Absolute 

1  Orig.  Com  in.  in  Joh.  torn,  i,  cap.  16  2  Ib.  c.  31. 

3  cc.  2,  3. 


IO2  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

God  (6  0eo9,  or  aurotfeo?) ;  after  Whom  come 
successively  the  Word  (0eo9,  without  the  article,  or 
6  Xo7o?),  the  various  Images  of  God,  represented  by 
the  sun,  moon  and  stars,  and  lastly  the  beings  who 
are  gods  in  name  but  not  in  reality.  Corresponding 
to  these  orders  of  beings  we  find  a  variety  of  religions. 
In  the  lowest  class  are  the  worshippers  of  daemons 
or  idols :  in  the  next,  those  who  worship  the  powers 
of  nature,  but  are  yet  free  from  idol-worship :  above 
them  come  the  ordinary  Christians  who  "  know  nothing 
save  Jesus  Christ  and  Him  crucified,"  who  are,  that 
is,  incapable  of  rising  from  the  adoration  of  the 
Incarnate  Word  to  that  of  the  Eternal ;  whilst  the 
highest  class  consists  of  the  favoured  few  to  whom 
the  Word  of  God  has  come,  and  who  are  capable  of 
worshipping  God  alone,  without  the  mediation  even 
of  the  Incarnate  Son. 

These  classes  of  worship  are  described  as  though 
they  were  definitely  crystallized  forms  of  religion. 
Origen  makes  it  clear  however  that  they  are  also 
stages  in  men's  religious  education ;  that  men  can 
and  do  pass  from  one  to  another  of  them,  and  that, 
in  order  to  reach  the  highest  form  of  worship,  each 
individual  must  pass  through  one  at  least  of  the  lower. 
To  this  highest  class  none  but  the  highest  spirits  can 
attain  during  this  present  life,  but  Origen  clearly 
believes  that  in  some  future  state  of  existence  all  men 
will  ultimately  be  brought  into  complete  communion 
with  God.  The  whole  of  his  teaching  upon  this 
subject  is  closely  allied  to  that  of  Philo,  who  maintains 
that  astronomy  has  played  an  important  part  in  the 
religious  education  of  mankind. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  IO3 

It  may  of  course  be  said  that  Origen's  philosophy 
is  as  essentially  a  philosophy  of  the  few  as  that  of 
Plotinus  himself.  That  is  in  a  sense  true,  for  the 
inner  circle  to  whom  his  mystical  teaching  is  addressed 
can  never  have  been  large.  At  the  same  time  there 
is  a  difference  between  Origen  and  Plotinus,  for 
whereas  the  latter  addresses  himself  solely  to  philo- 
sophers, Origen  never  entirely  loses  sight  of  the 
needs  of  the  ordinary  Christian.  He  usually  inserts 
a  simple  exposition  of  each  text  for  the  benefit  of 
the  "man  in  the  congregation1"  before  entering  upon 
the  more  imaginative  speculation  which  he  considers 
necessary  for  the  full  interpretation  of  scripture. 

The  De  Mysteriis  marks  the  second  stage  of  the 
struggle  between  Church  and  School.  In  this  stage 
the  plan  adopted  was  not  that  of  attacking  the  new 
system,  but  of  strengthening  the  old.  Between 
Porphyry  and  Hierocles  we  hear  of  no  Neoplatonist 
who  wrote  against  the  Christians,  the  energies  of  the 
school  were  devoted  rather  to  the  defence  and  elabora- 
tion of  theurgical  practices. 

The  next  writer  of  importance  with  whom  we 
have  to  deal  is  Eusebius.  His  twofold  relation  to 
Neoplatonism  has  been  mentioned  above,  so  that  we 
need  not  here  do  more  than  refer  to  passages  iri  his 
works  which  bear  out  what  has  already  been  said. 
The  references  to  Porphyry  in  the  Ecclesiastical 
History'2'  give  us  Eusebius'  estimate  of  him  as  the 
opponent  of  Christianity,  who  employs  abuse  instead 
of  argument,  and  falsifies  the  story  of  Ammonius 

1  6  e/CK\?7(ria<m/cos,  cf.  torn.  6,  c.  n  ;  torn.  13,  c.  44. 

2  Eus.  Hist.  EccL  6.  19. 


IO4  THE    RELATIONS    BETWEEN  [V 

Saccas  in  order  to  prove  the  superior  attractions  of 
paganism.  In  the  earlier  books  of  the  Praeparatio 
Evangelical  we  find  Eusebius  criticizing  Porphyry  as 
the  apologist  of  paganism  ;  pouring  contempt  on  his 
justification  of  the  use  of  images,  or  on  his  endeavour 
to  account  for  the  existence  of  the  world  by  means 
of  deities  who  are  themselves  dependent  upon  this 
world  for  their  very  existence. 

On  the  other  hand,  when  dealing  with  Neoplatonism 
apart  from  questions  of  religious  controversy,  Eusebius 
shows  a  distinct  sympathy  for  the  teaching  of  the 
school.  Of  this  sympathy  one  or  two  examples  will 
here  suffice,  although  it  would  not  be  difficult  to 
increase  the  number.  The  opening  chapter  of  the 
Praeparatio  Evangelica  has  about  it  an  undoubted 
ring  of  Neoplatonism.  Eusebius  describes  the  bless- 
ings promised  by  the  Gospel  as  including  "  all  that 
is  dear  to  the  souls  that  are  possessed  of  intellectual 
being,"  whilst  his  definition  of  the  true  piety,  and  his 
reference  to  the  Word  sent  like  a  ray  of  dazzling 
light  from  God  recall  to  our  minds  the  phraseology 
of  Plotinus2.  In  the  later  books  the  indications  of 
sympathy  are  yet  more  marked.  He  speaks  for  in- 
stance of  the  Platonists  as  foreshadowing  the  doctrine 
of  the  Holy  Trinity3,  and  quotes  Plotinus  upon  the 
\  immortality  of  the  soul4. 

Before  passing  on  to  the  Emperor  Julian,  a  word 
must  be  said  about  the  attitude  of  Athanasius  towards 
Neoplatonism.  Into  the  larger  question  of  the  Arian 

1  Eus.  Praep.  Evang.  3.  7,  3.  9,  3.  4. 

2  Ib.  i.  i.  3  Ib.  ii.  20,  p.  541  d. 
4  Ib.  15.  10,  p.  8nb. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  IO5 

controversy  we  cannot  enter  :  we  can  only  note  in 
passing  that  the  point  at  issue  was  no  mere  theological 
quibble  :  it  was  the  question,  whether  in  spite  of  the 
victory  of  Christianity  over  paganism,  a  new  poly- 
theism was  yet  to  be  allowed  to  crush  the  life  out 
of  Christian  teaching,  or  whether  the  Church  was 
strong  enough  to  bear  the  strain  of  finding  her  ranks 
suddenly  swelled  by  throngs  of  new  converts  each  of 
whom  brought  with  him  a  certain  residuum  of  pagan 
ideas1.  The  influence  of  Neoplatonism  upon  the 
course  of  the  controversy  seems  to  have  been  less 
than  we  might  have  expected  :  it  does  not  appear 
that  the  Arians  as  a  party  made  use  of  Neoplatonic 
doctrines,  or  that,  even  at  the  height  of  the  controversy 
the  orthodox  party  broke  away  from  all  contact  with 
the  school. 

In  his  Oration  against  the  Gentiles  Athanasius 
speaks  in  terms  which  remind  us  of  Origen  or 
Eusebius,  so  completely  does  he  reproduce  in  Christian 
form  the  teaching  of  Plotinus.  The  following  may 
serve  for  an  example2,  "  for  when  the  reason  of  man 
doth  not  converse  with  bodies,  then  hath  it  not  any 
mixture  of  the  desire  which  comes  from  these,  but  is 
wholly  at  one  with  itself,  as  it  was  at  the  beginning. 
Then,  passing  through  sensible  and  human  things  it 
becomes  raised  up,  and  beholding  the  Word,  sees  in 
Him  also  the  Father  of  the  Word,  delights  itself  with 
the  contemplation  of  Him,  and  continually  renews  itself 
afresh  with  the  longing  after  Him  :  even  as  the  Holy 
Scriptures  say  that  man  (who  in  the  Hebrew  tongue 

1  Cf.  Maurice,  Moral  and  Metaphysical  Philosophy,  p.  352. 

2  I  quote  from  Maurice,  p.  349. 


106  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

was  called  Adam)  with  unashamed  boldness  main- 
tained his  mind  towards  God,  and  had  intercourse 
with  the  saints  in  that  contemplation  of  intelligible 
things,  which  he  held  in  the  place  figuratively  termed 
by  Moses  Paradise." 

This  extract  will  be  sufficient  to  show  that  the 
greatest  of  the  Nicene  Fathers  was  thoroughly  in 
sympathy  with  the  higher  side  of  Neoplatonism,  a 
fact  which  goes  far  to  explain  the  absence  of  appeal 
to  Neoplatonic  doctrine  on  the  part  of  his  opponents. 
To  confront  the  teaching  of  the  New  Testament  with 
that  of  Plotinus  would  be  to  abandon  all  claim  to  be 
considered  Christians,  and  without  doing  this  it  was 
difficult  to  show  themselves  more  in  sympathy  with 
Neoplatonism  than  the  orthodox  party. 

iii 

We  now  reach  the  last  great  effort  that  was  made 
by  the  Neoplatonists  to  oust  Christianity  from  the 
position  which  it  had  won,  and  to  restore  the  old 
pagan  system  in  its  stead.  With  regard  to  the 
philosophy  of  Julian  something  has  been  said  in  an 
earlier  chapter ;  it  remains  to  discuss  briefly  his 
attitude  towards  the  Church.  His  aversion  to 
Christianity  is  not  difficult  to  explain1.  The  faith 
reached  him  through  the  agency  of  insincere  teachers  : 
it  was  tainted  with  Arianism,  and  poisoned  by  asso- 
ciation with  the  name  of  Constantius.  On  the  other 
hand  paganism  could  now  appeal  to  his  sympathy 
as  a  persecuted  religion  :  it  brought  with  it  all  the 

1  Cf.  Kendall,  The  Emperor  Julian,  pp.  41,  44. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND  CHRISTIANITY  IO/ 

attractions  of  Greek  poetry  and  Greek  philosophy,  and 
was  in  fact  associated  with  all  that  was  bright  in 
the  recollections  of  his  boyhood.  From  professed 
adherence  to  Christianity  he  passed  through  Neo- 
platonism  to  an  attachment  to  paganism,  at  first 
concealed,  but  after  his  cousin's  death  openly  avowed. 

What  then  was  the  policy  which  Julian  adopted 
towards  Christianity  ?  Persecution,  so  far  as  was 
possible,  he  avoided,  but  all  methods  of  checking 
Christianity  short  of  persecution  he  welcomed.  He 
wrote  against  the  Christians,  he  forbade  Christians  to 
teach  the  classics,  and  more  striking  than  either  of 
these  methods,  he  endeavoured  to  re-model  paganism 
on  Christian  lines.  In  his  seven  books  against  the 
Christians1  he  seems  to  have  argued  against  Christian 
refusal  to  recognise  the  inherence  of  evil  in  matter, 
to  have  quoted  a  number  of  passages  from  the  Old 
Testament  to  prove  the  immorality  and  impotence  of 
God,  and  to  have  subjected  the  New  Testament  to 
the  same  unsparing  criticism.  He  utterly  failed  to 
understand  Christianity,  and  he  allowed  his  prejudice 
against  it  to  influence  the  whole  of  his  writings  on 
the  subject. 

The  educational  edict  was  no  less  a  part  of  the 
attempt  to  restore  paganism.  If  the  old  religion  was 
to  recover  its  ground,  it  was  needful  to  help  it  to  make 
a  start,  and  the  manifest  unfairness,  in  Julian's  eyes, 
of  allowing  the  classics  to  be  taught  by  those  who 
refused  to  accept  the  gods  in  whose  honour  they  were 
written,  seemed  to  justify  this,  ingenious  measure  of 
repression.  It  was  doubtless  intended  to  aid  the  side 

1  Cf.  Kendall,  pp.  232-6. 


IO8  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

of  paganism  by  giving  a  pagan  bias  to  the  whole  of 
the  higher  education  of  the  Empire  as  well  as  by 
conferring  a  valuable  monopoly  upon  pagan  teachers. 

But  the  most  interesting  of  all  Julian's  actions 
were  his  endeavours  to  reform  paganism.  He  re- 
cognised the  enormous  superiority  of  the  Christians, 
in  their  general  standard  of  morality  and  in  the 
organization  of  their  Church.  In  both  points  Julian 
attempted  to  learn  a  lesson  from  his  opponents.  "He 
introduced  an  elaborate  sacerdotal  system.  The 
practices  of  sacred  reading,  preaching,  praying,  anti- 
phonal  singing,  penance  and  a  strict  ecclesiastical 
discipline  were  all  innovations  in  pagan  ritual.  Added 
to  these  was  a  system  of  organized  almsgiving  like 
that  to  which  Julian  attributed  so  much  of  the  success 
of  Christianity  ;  with  the  proceeds  temples  might  be 
restored,  the  poor  succoured,  the  sick  and  destitute 
relieved.  Nay,  if  Gregory's  words  are  more  than 
rhetoric,  even  monasteries  and  nunneries,  refuges  and 
hospitals,  were  reared  in  the  name  of  paganism1." 

The  attempt  however  failed.  Julian  had  over- 
estimated the  power  of  heathenism  as  much  as  he 
had  underestimated  that  of  Christianity.  He  hoped 
that  by  extending  to  paganism  that  patronage  which 
had  for  the  last  forty  years  been  given  to  Christianity, 
the  old  religion  would  be  able  to  assert  itself  and 
eject  the  usurper.  But  it  was  too  late,  and  Julian's 
effort  proved  to  be,  not  as  he  had  hoped,  the  dawn  of  a 
new  day,  but  the  last  flicker  of  paganism  before  its 
lamp  went  out  for  ever. 

1  Kendall,  p.  252. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  109 

iv 

We  have  now  endeavoured  to  trace  the  attitude 
of  Neoplatonism  towards  Christianity  from  the  time 
of  Plotinus  to  that  of  Julian.  Sometimes  the  Church 
was  treated  by  the  School  with  disdainful  silence : 
sometimes  there  was  an  outbreak  of  open  antagonism  ; 
but  the  official  attitude,  if  we  may  use  the  term,  was 
never  friendly.  At  the  same  time  there  are  several 
instances  of  individual  pagans  who  were  first  attracted 
by  the  teaching  of  the  Neoplatonists,  and  who 
passed  from  that  to  a  belief  in  Jesus  Christ,  finding  in 
the  Gospel  something  which  satisfied  them  in  a  way 
which  the  abstract  teaching  of  philosophy  was  unable 
to  do.  Such  a  man  was  Hilary  of  Poictiers1.  Born 
in  Western  Gaul  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  fourth 
century,  he  was  well  educated  like  many  other 
provincials  of  his  day.  He  learned  Greek,  and  in 
his  earlier  manhood  he  studied  Neoplatonism ;  and 
thus  in  middle  life  he  approached  Christianity.  We 
cannot  say  whether  it  was  before  or  after  his  conversion 
that  he  became  acquainted  with  the  works  of  Origen, 
but  at  some  period  he  appears  to  have  been  a  careful 
student,  not  of  Origen  only  but  of  Clement  and 
even  of  Philo.  The  way  in  which  he  was  led  on 
from  Neoplatonism  to  Christianity  may  best  be 
described  in  his  own  words2 :  "  While  my  mind  was 
dwelling  on  these  and  on  many  like  thoughts,  I 
chanced  upon  the  books  which,  according  to  the 

1  See  E.    W.  Watson's  Introduction,    in  Nicene  and  Post-Nicene 
Fathers. 

2  De  Trinitaie,  i.  5,  E.  W.  Watson's  trans. 


1 10  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

tradition  of  the  Hebrew  faith  were  written  by  Moses 
and  the  prophets  ;  and  found  in  them  words  spoken 
by  God  the  Creator,  testifying  of  Himself  I  AM 
THAT  I  AM,  and  again  HE  THAT  IS  hath  sent 
me  unto  you.  I  confess  that  I  was  amazed  to  find  in 
them  an  indication  concerning  God  so  exact  that  it 
expressed  in  the  terms  best  adapted  to  human  under- 
standing an  unattainable  insight  into  the  mystery  of 
the  divine  nature.  For  no  property  of  God  which 
the  mind  can  grasp  is  more  characteristic  of  Him  than 
existence,... and  it  was  worthy  of  Him  to  reveal  this 
one  thing,  that  HE  IS,  as  an  assurance  of  His 
absolute  eternity." 

Nor  does  Hilary  stand  alone,  as  an  educated 
pagan  who  passed  through  Neoplatonism  to  Chris- 
tianity. Born  half  a  century  later,  in  354  A.D.,  at 
Thagaste  in  North  Africa,  Augustine  travelled  on 
almost  the  same  road.  He  differed  indeed  from 
Hilary  in  that  his  mother  was  a  Christian,  so  that 
he  "  sucked  in  the  name  of  Christ  with  his  mother's 
milk1/'  but  Monnica,  though  a  saint,  was  not  an 
intellectual  woman,  and  for  many  years  she  had 
little  influence  over  her  brilliant  but  wayward  son.  He 
followed  his  own  bent.  Questions  of  one  kind  and 
another  soon  began  to  trouble  him,  and  first  of  all  he 
turned  to  the  Manicheans  for  an  answer.  They  offered 
to  solve  one  half  of  his  difficulties  by  sweeping  away 
the  Old  Testament  with  all  its  problems,  and  the 
other  half  by  declaring  that  the  world  is  as  bad  as 
it  can  be,  so  that  no  man  is  responsible  for  his  own 

1  Aug.  Conf.  3.  4. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  III 

sins.  But  Augustine  could  not  rest  satisfied  with 
this  creed  for  long.  His  own  common  sense,  and  the 
evil  lives  of  some  of  the  Manicheans,  decided  him  to 
seek  for  something  better :  and  in  his  twenty-ninth 
year,  when  lecturer  in  Rhetoric  at  Milan,  he  began 
to  apply  himself  closely  to  the  study  of  Neoplatonism. 
This  cleared  away  his  intellectual  difficulties,  but 
still  it  failed  to  satisfy  him.  The  Neoplatonic  con- 
ception of  sin  as  a  pure  negation  which  does  not 
really  affect  the  inner  life  and  soul  of  the  sinner,  and 
which  can  be  driven  out  of  the  system  by  a  course 
of  discipline,  he  felt  to  be  incomplete:  and  the 
sermons  of  Ambrose,  Bishop  of  Milan,  drew  him  on 
to  a  fuller  understanding  of  the  depth  and  comfort 
of  the  Christian  faith.  So  he  passed  on  to  his  baptism 
at  the  age  of  thirty-two,  and  four  years  later  he  was 
ordained.  In  395  he  was  consecrated  Bishop  as 
coadjutor  to  Valerius,  after  whose  death  in  the 
following  year  he  became  Bishop  of  the  diocese  of 
Hippo.  This  office  he  continued  to  hold,  up  to  the 
time  of  his  death  in  430  A.D. 

It  will  be  well  to  consider  the  case  of  Augustine  a 
little  more  closely,  for  we  are  fortunate  in  possessing 
ample  evidence  as  to  the  effect  produced  by  Neo- 
platonism upon  his  life  and  thought.  We  have  in 
the  first  place  the  detailed  account  of  his  conversion 
written  by  himself  in  the  Confessions  and  we  also 
find  in  his  later  writings  a  mass  of  material  out  of 
which  to  form  an  estimate  of  the  permanence  of  the 
mark  left  by  Neoplatonism  upon  his  theology. 

Neoplatonism,  as  we  have  seen,  was  the  half-way 
house  at  which  Augustine  made  a  stay  between 


112  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

Manicheism  and  Christianity1.  At  the  time  of  his 
baptism,  and  indeed  for  some  years  after,  its  influence 
upon  him  was  very  strong,  but  gradually  his  feeling 
of  obligation  to  the  school  faded  away,  and  in  his 
later  writings  we  sometimes  find  him  using  stern 
language  about  the  dangers  of  philosophy2.  There 
was  however  one  lesson  of  enduring  value  which 
Augustine  owed  to  the  Neoplatonists.  It  was  to 
them  that  he  owed  his  first  grasp  of  the  doctrine 
of  the  Being  of  God3.  From  the  Neoplatonists  he 
would  learn  about  the  transcendent  greatness  of  God, 
how  God  is  so  entirely  beyond  our  knowledge  that 
it  is  better  to  confess  ignorance  than  rashly  to  claim 
that  we  comprehend  Him.  It  is  impossible  to 
describe  Him  in  positive  terms,  and  all  that  we  can 
do  is  to  define  in  some  directions  what  He  is  not4. 
Thus  God  is  simple  and  unchangeable,  incorruptible 
and  eternal,  untrammelled  by  limitations  of  time  and 
space,  ever  present,  yet  always  in  a  spiritual,  not  in 
a  corporeal  sense,  infinitely  great,  infinitely  good, 
infinite  in  His  power  and  justice5.  And  it  is  to  be 
noted  that  not  only  is  Augustine's  teaching  about 
the  Being  of  God  similar  to  that  of  Plotinus,  but  that 
there  is  a  close  parallelism  between  the  arguments 
and  illustrations  whereby  the  two  writers  seek  to 
establish  their  respective  positions6.  It  is  not  too 

1  Grandgeorge,  Saint  Augustin  et  le  Neo-Platonisme,  p.  149. 

2  e.g.  Serm.  348;  Grandgeorge,  p.  28. 

3  Ib.  p.  60. 

4  Aug.  De  Civ.  Dei,  9.  16;  Serm.  117.  5;  De  Trin.  82. 

5  Cf.  Plot.  Enn.  6.  5.  9,  3.  9.  3,  4.  4.  n,  3.  7.  i ;  Aug.  Conf.  i.  2, 
n.  31,  12.  ii ;  De  Miis.  6.  11 

6  Cf.  Grandgeorge,  p.  70. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND  CHRISTIANITY  113 

much  to  say  that  in  this  department  of  theology, 
Augustine's  expression  of  his  doctrine  was  largely 
coloured  by  the  writings  of  Plotinus  which  he  had 
studied. 

But  Christian  doctrine  and  Augustinian  theology 
carry  us  beyond  bald  statements  about  the  attributes 
of  the  Deity,  and  it  will  be  well  for  us  to  compare  the 
teaching  of  Augustine  with  that  of  Plotinus  on  the 
subject  of  the  Trinity1.  There  is  of  course  at  first 
sight  an  obvious  similarity  between  Neoplatonism 
and  Christianity  in  this  matter.  Both  alike  speak 
of  the  Supreme  Being  as  in  some  sense  threefold. 
Both  alike  insist  on  Existence  and  Unity  and  Good- 
ness as  the  absolute  prerogatives  of  the  ultimate 
source  of  all  being.  There  is  moreover  a  close 
resemblance  between  the  terms  Mind  and  Word, 
Soul  and  Spirit,  which  they  apply  respectively  to  the 
second  and  third  manifestations  of  the  One  Deity. 
At  the  same  time,  a  very  little  examination  will 
make  it  plain  that  this  resemblance  is  only  superficial. 
The  very  word  Subsistence,  vTroo-raat,^,  which  is 
applied  by  both  to  the  Persons  or  Principles  of  the 
Trinity,  is  used  in  different  senses.  In  the  writings 
of  Plotinus,  it  signifies  substantial  existence,  and 
when  the  Neoplatonists  distinguish  between  three 
Subsistences  in  their  trinity,  they  are  emphasizing 
the  very  doctrine  which  the  orthodox  party  in  the 
Arian  controversy  strained  every  nerve  to  refute, — 
the  doctrine  that  there  is  a  difference  of  substance 
between  the  Father,  the  Son  and  the  Holy  Ghost. 
On  the  other  hand,  when  a  post-Nicene  Father 

1  Cf.  Grandgeorge,-c.  in. 
E.N.  8 


114  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

employs  the  term,  he  signifies  by  it  a  Person,  and 
this  in  turn  is  what  Plotinus  refused  to  predicate  of 
his  first  Principles. 

And  when  we  go  further,  and  compare  the  two 
doctrines  in  detail,  we  cannot  fail  to  be  struck  by 
the  utter  absence  of  love  in  the  Neoplatonic  system. 
Not  only  is  The  One  absolutely  impersonal,  but  it 
takes  cognizance  of  nothing  except  itself.  It  is  true 
that  Mind  emanates  from  The  One,  and  in  due 
course  Soul  emanates  from  Mind,  but  in  each  case, 
the  superior  principle  entirely  ignores  the  existence 
of  that  below,  and  looks  simply  and  solely  to  itself 
and  to  that  above.  There  is  thus  no  thought  of  the 
mutual  Love  which  subsists  between  the  Three 
Persons  of  the  Holy  Trinity,  and  the  three  principles 
of  Neoplatonism  are  subordinated  one  to  another, 
and  are  in  no  sense  coeternal  together  and  coequal1. 
The  only  real  identity  of  teaching  lies  in  this,  that 
Christian  and  Neoplatonist  alike  emphasize  the 
Unity  of  God,  and  both  alike  hold  that  this  unity 
somehow  admits  of  plurality,  and  that  there  is  some 
kind  of  Trinity  connected  with  the  Supreme  Being. 

It  may  be  remarked  that  the  Christian  doctrine 
of  the  Holy  Trinity  is  anterior  to  the  rise  of  Neo- 
platonism, so  that  it  is  not  to  be  imagined  that  the 
Church  derived  her  teaching  from  the  philosophers. 
At  the  same  time  it  is  possible  that  the  writings  of 
Philo  and  the  Neoplatonists  helped  the  Christian 
Fathers  to  clear  their  ideas,  when  it  became  necessary 
to  expand  and  define  the  doctrine  of  the  Church. 
There  is  of  course  a  difference  between  the  stand- 
1  Plot.  Enn.  5.  2.  2. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  115 

points  of  the  two,  for  the  Christian  dogma  is  not  a 
philosophical  thesis  but  a  verity  of  revealed  religion. 
But  in  maintaining  the  philosophical  reasonableness 
of  the  doctrine,  the  Christian  apologist  found  an  ally 
in  Plotinus,  for  part  at  all  events  of  the  struggle  ;  and 
of  his  help  Augustine  is  willing  to  avail  himself  so  far 
as  it  goes. 

We  next  pass  on  to  the  relations  between  God 
and  the  created  world1.  In  the  view  of  Plotinus  and 
of  Augustine  alike,  the  world  is  the  result  of  God's 
actiofc  :  but  there  their  agreement  ceases.  We  have 
seen  that  the  Neoplatonic  principles  are  devoid  of 
love ;  they  are  no  less  devoid  of  will.  It  is  true 
that  the  intelligible  world  owes  its  origin  to  Mind 
and  the  physical  world  has  been  derived  from  Soul, 
but  neither  of  these  creative  acts  is  an  expression 
of  the  ^vjll.  Each  world  is  rather  the  inevitable 
result  of' the  goodness  of  the  creator,  the  necessary 
shadow  or  'reflection  of  the  infinite2.  Plotinus  com- 
pares the  creating  principle  to  a  spring  or  to  the  life 
in  a  tree,  and  creation  to  the  ripples  on  the  surface  of 
the  water,  or  to  the  twigs  and  branches  in  which  the 
life  gives  evidence  of  its  presence3.  To  Augustine  on 
the  other  hand  there  is  no  question  of  necessity  or 
inevitability.  The  world  is  in  a  real  sense  created, 
not  generated  ;  it  owes  its  existence  to  the  Will  of 
God,  and  it  was  made  out  of  nothing4.  There  is  in 
fact  no  need  for  the  interposition  of  a  series  of  links 
between  God  and  matter.  We  find  then  in  Plotinus 

1  Cf.  Grandgeorge,  c.  iv. 

2  Plot.  Enn.  3.  i.  2.  3  Ib.  3.  8.  10. 

4  Aug.  De  Fid.  et  Symb.  1.2;  Grandgeorge,  p.  1 10. 

8—2 


Il6  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

three  subsistences,  emanating  one  from  another,  and 
giving  birth  to  the  world  by  the  sheer  necessity  of 
their  nature,  and  in  Augustine,  the  creation  of  the 
world  by  the  voluntary  act  of  the  One  God,  freely 
done  out  of  His  loving  kindness  towards  His  creatures. 
It  remains  to  compare  the  teaching  of  Plotinus 
with  that  of  Augustine  upon  the  problem  of  evil1. 
According  to  Plotinus,  the  source  of  evil  in  the  world 
is  to  be  found  in  the  inherent  qualities  of  matter. 
Matter  contains  elements  of  change  and  decay,  and 
it  is  therefore  the  absolute  antithesis  of  true  existence 
or  goodness.  And  just  as  the  world  contains  elements 
of  good,  because  it  has  come  into  existence  through 
the  inevitable  working  of  the  goodness  of  Soul,  so, 
taking  as  it  does  its  visible  form  from  matter,  it  con- 
tains no  less  inevitably  elements  of  evil2.  At  the 
same  time,  evil  is  devoid  of  real  existence — it  is  in 
fact  but  a  lesser  degree  of  good — so  that  the  physical 
world,  albeit  imperfect,  is  still  a  true  copy  of  the  in- 
telligible. Indeed  the  world  as  a  whole  is  good  and 
happy,  and  it  is  as  foolish  to  condemn  the  whole 
because  parts  are  faulty,  as  it  would  be  to  condemn 
the  whole  human  race  because  it  produced  a  Thersites3. 
Now  man's  sinfulness  is  the  necessary  result  of  his 
bodily  nature,  but  this  union  of  soul  and  body  is  not 
entirely  evil.  In  spite  of  the  tendency  to  sin,  human 
liberty  is  safeguarded,  for  the  soul  is  capable,  if  it 
chooses,  of  detaching  itself  from  the  sensible  world 
and  turning  back  towards  the  intelligible,  nor  can 
the  body  prevent  it  from  so  doing.  It  is  therefore 
possible  for  man,  by  a  long  course  of  self-discipline, 

1  Cf.  Grandgeorge,  c.  v.         2  Enn.  3.  2.  2.         3  Ib.  3.  2.  3. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  1 1/ 

to  purify  himself,  and  to  rise  at  last  into  union  with 
The  One1. 

These  views  of  Plotinus  made  a  profound  impres- 
sion on  the  mind  of  Augustine.  Not  only  had  he 
himself  passed  through  Manicheism  in  his  earlier 
years,  but  after  his  conversion  he  was  still  engaged  in 
combating  Gnostic  dualism.  And  in  discussing  the 
problem  of  evil,  no  less  than  in  maintaining  the 
doctrine  of  the  Holy  Trinity,  he  was  always  ready  to 
make  use  of  such  help  as  Neoplatonism  could  supply. 
Nor  was  it  difficult  for  him  to  do  so.  Church  and 
School  alike  based  their  teaching  on  the  doctrine  that 
the  world  owes  its  existence  to  the  goodness  of  God, 
and  in  this  particular  connexion  there  was  no  need  to 
draw  attention  to  the  difference  between  Generation 
and  Creation.  Accordingly  Augustine  makes  free 
use  of  statements  and  illustrations  which  recall  the 
teaching  of  Plotinus.  He  reminds  us  that  there  is 
abundant  evidence  of  God's  good  providence  in  the 
world,  and  asserts  that  the  world  is  indubitably  the 
work  of  a  perfect  craftsman2.  Yet  the  fact  remains  that 
we  see  evil  all  around  us.  How  can  this  be  explained  ? 
We  see  it  because  the  world,  though  good,  is  not 
perfect.  If  it  were  perfect,  it  would  be  incorruptible  : 
were  it  not  good  it  would  be  below  the  possibility  of 
further  corruption.  And  evil,  in  spite  of  appearances 
to  the  contrary,  is  devoid  of  true  existence:  for,  if  it 
possessed  true  being,  it  would  of  necessity  be  good3. 

Again,  like  Plotinus,  Augustine  is  confident  of 
the  ultimate  triumph  of  good,  and  like  him  too  he 
suggests  that  evil  may  even  be  regarded  as  a  factor 

1  Enn.  6.  9.  ii.       2  Aug.  De  Civ.  Dei,  n.  22.       8,  Aug.  Conf.  7.  12. 


Il8  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

in  the  progress  of  mankind.  Poverty  and  sickness 
are  sometimes  conducive  to  the  well-being  of  the 
body,  and  it  may  be  that  our  sins  actually  conduce  to 
the  progress  of  the  universe1.  At  this  point  however 
the  Christian  Father  is  faced  with  a  problem  from 
which  the  heathen  philosopher  is  free.  If  this  view 
be  correct,  if  evil  actually  leads  us  on  towards  good, 
why  does  God  punish  the  guilty  ?  Augustine  parries 
the  question  by  answering  that  it  is  the  sin  that  is 
punished,  whilst  it  is  the  soul  that  makes  the  progress. 
Indeed  it  is  this  system  of  reward  for  good  and  punish- 
ment for  sin  that  enables  the  universe  to  be  as  perfect 
as  it  is.  For  sin  is  not  truly  natural  to  us,  but  a 
voluntary  affection  of  our  nature,  and  in  the  same 
way  punishment  must  be  regarded,  not  indeed  as 
natural,  but  as  a  penal  affection  consequent  upon  sin2. 
The  key  to  the  whole  problem  of  evil  is  found  by 
Augustine  and  Plotinus  alike,  in  the  unbroken  chain 
of  causation  which  we  see  in  the  universe.  Nothing 
comes  to  pass  by  mere  chance :  everything  is  the  result 
of  some  cause,  and  everything  too  produces  its  own 
effect.  We  must  not  then  complain  blindly  against  the 
existence  of  sin,  for  sin  is  the  result  of  free  will,  and 
without  free  will  man  would  be  less  perfect  than  he 
is3.  Indeed  the  world  would  fall  short  of  its  present 
perfection,  were  it  not  composed  of  many  different 
elements,  some  of  them  higher  in  the  scale  of  being 
and  some  lower.  We  must  not  complain  because  the 
earthly  sphere  is  not  on  the  same  level  as  the  heavenly, 

1  Aug.  De  Ordine,  2.  4;  Plot.  Enn.  3.  2.  n. 

2  Aug.  De  Lib.  Arb.  3.  9.  25. 

3  Plot.  Enn.  3.  2.  7;  Aug.  De  Lib.  Arb.  3.  i.  2. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND -CHRISTIANITY  I  19 

but  we  might  reasonably  complain  if  there  were  no 
heaven  for  us  to  gaze  at  from  earth1.  Evil  then  has 
a  legitimate  place  in  the  world,  but  it  is  simply  a 
negation,  a  falling  short  of  the  highest  possibilities. 

There  is  of  course  another  great  section  of 
Augustine's  work  to  which  no  reference  has  as  yet 
been  made — his  controversy  with  the  Pelagians  upon 
the  question  of  Original  Sin.  But  a  full  discussion  of 
this  subject  would  carry  us  far  beyond  the  scope  of 
the  present  essay,  and  it  will  be  sufficient  to  note  that 
Augustine's  view  of  original  sin  does  not  appear  to 
be  connected  with  Plotinus'  account  of  the  contamina- 
tion of  the  soul  due  to  its  descent  into  matter.  But 
enough  has  been  said  to  indicate  the  extent  to  which 
Augustine  was  indebted  to  the  Neoplatonists  and 
the  points  at  which  he  found  their  system  defective. 
It  was  to  him  a  temporary  shelter,  where  he  could 
release  himself  from  the  entanglements  of  Manicheism 
and  make  ready  for  his  final  conversion  to  Christianity. 
But,  that  conversion  once  effected,  the  influence  of 
Neoplatonism  declined.  There  was  indeed  no  sudden 
break,  and  to  the  end  of  his  life  Augustine  did  not 
disdain,  when  necessary,  to  borrow  a  weapon  from 
the  Neoplatonic  armoury.  But  the  system  ceased  to 
excite  his  enthusiasm :  it  had  done  its  work,  and 
after  that  it  failed  to  satisfy  Augustine  as  it  failed  to 
conquer  the  world. 

1  Aug.  De  Lib.  Arb.  3.  5.  13. 


I2O  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 


In  the  earlier  part  of  the  present  chapter,  an 
attempt  has  been  made  to  trace  the  influence  which 
was  brought  to  bear  upon  the  leaders  of  Christianity 
by  the  great  representatives  of  Neoplatonism.  It 
will  be  well  for  us,  before  going  further,  to  consider 
the  influence,  less  direct  but  not  less  important,  which 
Neoplatonism  exercised  upon  the  development  of 
Christian  thought  through  the  writings  of  its  greatest 
Christian  exponent.  The  name  of  Origen  has  always 
possessed  a  remarkable  fascination  for  churchmen  of 
every  school,  and  this  fascination  is  due  to  a  variety 
of  causes.  It  is  in  part  due  to  the  unique  position 
occupied  by  Origen  in  ecclesiastical  speculation. 
There  cannot  fail  to  be  something  interesting  about  a 
writer  who  is  denounced  as  the  father  of  Arianism, 
and  who  yet  finds  a  champion  in  Athanasius.  But  it 
is  due  no  less  to  the  simple  holiness  of  his  ascetic  life, 
the  memory  of  which  survived  for  centuries,  even 
among  those  who  looked  on  him  as  a  dangerous 
heresiarch.  "  There  is  a  perplexed  controversy " 
writes  a  German  chronicler  of  the  fifteenth  century, 
"  in  which  sundry  people  engage  about  Samson, 
Solomon,  Trajan  and  Origen,  whether  they  were  saved 
or  not.  That  I  leave  to  the  Lord1." 

The   position    and    the   teaching   were   not    long 
suffered   to    pass    unchallenged2.      Even    before   his 

1  Westcott,  Religious  Thought  in  the  West,  p.  224. 

2  See  A.  W.  W.  Dale,  art.  "  Origenistic   Controversies"  in  Diet. 
Christ.  Biog. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  121 

death  in  253,  attacks  were  made  upon  him  by 
Demetrius,  Bishop  of  Alexandria,  who  seems  twice 
to  have  procured  his  condemnation.  On  the  first  of 
these  occasions  there  was  no  direct  reference  to 
doctrine,  the  charges  preferred  dealing  simply  with 
the  irregularity  of  Origen's  ordination  to  the  Priest- 
hood. It  is  however  possible  that  questions  of 
doctrine  formed  part  of  the  second  attack,  when  a 
gathering  of  Egyptian  Bishops  declared  that  his 
ordination  was  to  be  considered  null  and  void.  But 
this  sentence,  although  it  is  said  by  Jerome  to  have 
been  ratified  by  the  Bishop  of  Rome,  carried  but 
little  real  weight.  It  merely  reflected  the  personal 
feelings  of  Demetrius,  and  after  his  death  it  was  soon 
forgotten.  Heraclas,  the  successor  alike  of  Origen  at 
the  Catechetical  School  and  of  Demetrius  as  Bishop 
of  Alexandria,  did  nothing  to  express  his  approval  or 
disapproval  of  the  condemnation,  but  Dionysius,  who 
followed  Heraclas  in  both  offices,  openly  defended 
Origen's  teaching  and  character,  and  in  particular 
maintained  stoutly  the  value  of  allegorical  interpreta- 
tion. Among  those  who  came  after  him  at  Alexandria 
may  be  mentioned  the  names  of  Theognostus,  who 
wrote  several  books  in  imitation  of  the  De  Principiis> 
and  Pierius,  whose  support  of  Origen's  views,  alike  on 
the  subordination  of  the  Holy  Spirit  to  the  Father 
and  the  Son,  and  on  the  pre-natal  existence  of  the 
human  soul,  earned  for  him  the  name  of  "  the  Second 
Origen." 

But  whilst  at  Alexandria  the  influence  of  Origen 
soon  reasserted  itself,  there  were  other  quarters  in 
which  attacks  were  made  upon  his  teaching.  The 


122  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

treatise  published  by  Methodius  of  Patara  has  already 
been  mentioned.  This  was  immediately  answered  by 
Pamphilus  and  Eusebius,  who  set  to  work  in  306  to 
compile  a  defence  of  the  impugned  doctrines.  It  is 
not  necessary  to  enter  into  the  details  of  their 
argument :  suffice  it  to  say  that,  whilst  maintaining 
the  general  orthodoxy  of  Origen  in  matters  of  faith, 
they  admitted  that  in  cases  where  the  church  was 
silent,  he  had  indulged  in  speculations  of  varying 
merits.  Such  tentative  theories,  however,  must  not 
be  placed  on  a  level  with  statements  of  doctrine,  nor 
was  it  fair  to  stigmatize  their  author  as  heretical. 

It  has  been  remarked  in  an  earlier  chapter  that 
the  direct  influence  of  Neoplatonism  upon  the  Arian 
controversy  was  less  than  might  perhaps  have  been 
expected.  At  the  same  time,  the  struggle  had  not  gone 
far  before  the  name  of  Origen  was  dragged  in.  He  was 
denounced  by  many  of  the  orthodox  party  as  the  father 
of  Arianism,  and  the  Arians  were,  for  the  most  part, 
ready  enough  to  claim  his  authority  for  their  doctrine 
of  the  Logos.  At  the  same  time  there  were  curious 
exceptions  to  this  rule.  Aetius,  an  Arian  writer, 
attacked  both  Origen  and  Clement,  and  on  the  other 
side  Athanasius  defended  Origen,  and  maintained 
that  the  view  of  the  Logos  set  forth  in  his  writings 
was  orthodox.  It  is  true  that  there  were  speculations 
and  suggestions  of  which  Athanasius  could  not  approve, 
but  his  doctrine  was  in  the  main  sound,  and  his  life 
had  been  that  of  a  holy  and  wonderful  saint. 

A  few  years  later,  in  the  middle  of  the  fourth 
century,  there  appears  on  the  scene  the  little  band  of 
Cappadocian  Fathers,  Basil  of  Caesarea,  Gregory  of 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND   CHRISTIANITY  123 

Nazianzus,  and  Gregory  of  Nyssa.  All  three  were 
enthusiastic  students  of  Origen,  and  the  two  former 
edited  in  his  defence  the  series  of  extracts  from  his 
writings  known  as  the  Philocalia.  It  may  be  of 
interest  to  add  an  account  of  the  teaching  of  Gregory 
of  Nyssa,  in  order  to  illustrate  the  extent  to  which 
the  Cappadocians  were  indebted  to  their  master,  and 
the  modifications  which  the  lapse  of  a  century  had 
brought  into  his  system1.  According  to  Gregory, 
Philosophy  is  not  identical  with  Theology,  nor  yet  on 
an  equality  therewith  ;  it  rather  occupies  the  position 
of  handmaid.  The  teaching  of  Plato  can  indeed  be 
employed  in  the  defence  of  Christianity,  against 
polytheism,  but  there  are  times  when  it  is  necessary 
for  us  to  leave  the  Platonic  car2.  He  adopts  Origen's 
view  that  evil  is  non-being,  and  he  very  nearly 
identifies  the  principle  of  evil  with  matter3.  God, 
from  Whom  all  goodness  flows,  is  unchangeable,  but 
the  act  of  creation  was  itself  a  change  from  non- 
existence  into  being,  and  it  therefore  leaves  a 
possibility  of  change  in  its  results.  On  the  other 
hand,  Gregory  seldom  refers  to  the  Neoplatonic 
distinction  between  intelligible  and  sensible,  and 
prefers  to  make  use  of  the  Christian  distinctions 
between  Creator  and  created,  Infinite  and  finite. 

In  thus  attempting  to  set  forth  Christian  doctrines 
in  a  philosophical  form,  it  was  inevitable  that  Gregory 
should  be  in  some  sense  the  pupil  of  him  who  had 
led  the  way  in  this  branch  of  research,  and  to  whom 
the  existing  vocabulary  of  Christian  philosophy  was 

1  Cf.  Moore  and  Wilson,  Nicene  and  Post-Nicene  Fathers^  vol.  v. 

2  De  Anim.  et  Resurr.  Moore  and  Wilson,  p.  8.  3  Ib.  p.  9. 


124  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

due.  Hence  we  are  not  surprised  to  find  that 
Gregory  adopts  and  approves  of  the  allegorical 
method  of  interpretation.  But  in  other  matters  we 
find  him  introducing  changes  into  his  master's  system. 
Thus  he  combats  Origen's  theory  of  the  pre-natal 
existence  of  the  soul1,  accepting  the  traducianist  view, 
that  the  world  of  spirits  was  created  in  idea  at  the 
beginning,  but  that  each  individual  soul  comes  into 
existence  like  the  body  by  generation.  So  too  in 
the  case  of  the  resurrection  of  the  body2.  Gregory 
partly  adopts  Origen's  teaching,  and  partly  modifies 
it,  and  asserts  that  creation  is  to  be  saved  by  man's 
carrying  his  created  body  into  a  higher  world. 

There  is  then  plenty  of  evidence  of  the  popularity 
of  Origen's  writings  in  the  Eastern  Church,  and  of 
the  influence  which  they  exerted.  At  the  same  time 
there  was  no  lack  of  opposition.  Epiphanius,  the 
"sleuth-hound  of  heresy3"  was  on  his  track,  and 
made  no  less  than  four  separate  attacks  upon  his 
doctrine.  His  objections  fall  into  three  classes, 
attacks  on  the  alleged  Arian  tendencies  of  Origen's 
teaching,  attacks  on  his  psychology,  and  attacks  on 
the  allegorical  method  of  interpretation.  But  the 
object  of  the  present  section  is  not  so  much  to  give 
a  history  of  the  Origenistic  controversies,  as  to  trace 
out  the  power  and  influence  of  Origen's  writings,  and 
therefore  we  must  turn  back  for  a  moment,  and  mark 
the  spread  of  these  doctrines  among  the  Latin-speak- 
ing Christians  of  the  West. 

The    days    had    long   since    passed    away   when 

1  Moore  and  Wilson,  p.  19.  2  Ib.  p.  21. 

3  Swete,  Patristic  Study  >  p.  86. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  125 

Greek  was  the  natural  language,  in  which  to  address 
the  Christians  of  Italy,  and,  although  there  were  of 
course  exceptions,  the  majority  of  Western  Christians 
read  Greek  philosophy  and  theology  only  through 
the  medium  of  Latin  translations.  Thus  it  was  in 
Victorinus'  translations  that  Augustine  first  read  the 
works  of  the  Neoplatonists1,  and  in  the  prefaces  to 
Jerome's  commentaries  we  find  references  to  those 
Christians  who  are  unable  to  read  Alexandrian 
theology  in  the  original  tongue.  Accordingly,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  fourth  century  there  was  but  little 
real  knowledge  of  Origen  in  the  Western  Church, 
although  there  was  some  uneasiness  about  the  views 
ascribed  to  him.  But  in  the  latter  part  of  this  century, 
two  scholars  set  themselves  to  translate  his  works 
into  Latin  for  the  benefit  of  their  fellow-countrymen. 
These  were  Jerome  and  Rufinus,  who  had  gone  to 
Palestine  to  preside  over  monasteries  at  Bethlehem 
and  on  the  Mount  of  Olives  respectively.  Jerome  is 
said  by  Rufinus  to  have  translated  no  fewer  than 
seventy  of  Origen's  treatises,  and  several  of  his  extant 
works,  for  instance  his  Commentary  on  the  Epistle 
to  the  Ephesians,  are  largely  derived  from  this  source 
Nor  had  Jerome,  at  this  early  period,  any  hesitation 
about  defending  Origen  against  his  detractors.  In  a 
letter  to  Paula  written  in  385  A.D.2,  he  declares  that 
these  attacks  are  due,  not  to  love  of  orthodoxy,  but 
to  envy  of  the  Alexandrian  Father's  genius. 

But  soon  there  comes  a  change.  In  392  an 
Egyptian  monk  named  Aterbius  visited  Jerusalem, 
and  accused  Rufinus  of  heresy,  on  account  of  his 

1  Aug.  Con/.  8.  2.  2  Hieron.  ep.  33,  Migne. 


126  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

support  of  Origen.  This  accusation  caused  Jerome 
considerable  alarm,  and  when,  two  years  later, 
Epiphanius  followed  with  a  yet  stronger  indictment, 
Jerome  declared  himself  the  opponent  of  Origen's 
doctrine.  Rufinus  on  the  other  hand  stood  firm. 
He  published  translations,  first  of  the  Apology  of 
Pamphilus  and  Eusebius,  and  then  of  Origen's  De 
PrincipiiS)  and  begged  his  readers  to  disregard  the 
cry  of  heresy,  and  to  learn  the  truth  for  themselves. 
At  the  same  time,  he  tried  to  reassure  them  by 
declaring  his  own  firm  belief  in  the  Holy  Trinity 
and  in  the  resurrection  of  the  body,  and  by  asserting 
that  the  heretical  passages  in  Origen's  works  were 
later  interpolations. 

It  would  be  a  thankless  task  to  discuss  in  detail 
the  long  and  wearisome  controversy  which  followed. 
Both  Jerome  and  Rufinus  allowed  themselves  to  be 
so  far  carried  away  by  the  heat  of  the  conflict  as  to 
forget  the  moderation  which  their  position  as  theo- 
logians of  the  Christian  Church  demanded.  The 
victory  rested  with  the  opponents  of  Origen. 
Anastasius,  Bishop  of  Rome,  after  an  examination, 
not  indeed  of  the  whole  of  Origen's  works,  but  of  a 
series  of  excerpts  forwarded  to  him  by  the  partizans 
of  Epiphanius,  formally  condemned  his  writings,  and 
reprimanded  Rufinus.  The  later  stages  of  the  quarrel 
assumed  a  political  rather  than  a  theological  character, 
and  need  not  detain  us.  But  the  whole  controversy 
shows  the  importance  of  the  position  which  Origen 
was  felt  to  occupy  in  Christian  speculation,  and  the 
interest  that  was  taken  in  his  writings.  Even  after 
his  condemnation  there  were  probably  many  like 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  12? 

Theophilus  of  Alexandria,  who  continued  to  read  his 
works  "culling  the  flower  and  passing  by  the  thorn1." 
Nor  must  the  influence  of  the  Latin  translations  be 
forgotten,  for  even  if  the  works  of  Rufinus  were 
regarded  with  disfavour,  there  was  no  such  stigma 
attaching  to  the  earlier  writings  of  Jerome,  several 
of  which  were  largely  based  on  Origen. 

It  is  pleasant  to  turn  from  the  polemics  of 
Epiphanius  and  Jerome  to  one  of  the  most  delightful 
characters  of  the  ancient  world.  Of  Synesius  the 
philosopher  something  has  been  said  in  the  last 
chapter :  we  are  now  concerned  with  Synesius  the 
Christian.  It  is  not  easy  to  assign  a  date  to  his 
conversion.  He  married  a  Christian  lady,  perhaps  in 
403  A.D.,  and  it  is  probable  that  three  out  of  his  six 
Christian  hymns  were  written  before  406 2.  It  is  thus 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  he  was  converted  four  or 
five  years  before  his  elevation  to  the  Episcopate  in 
409.  But  at  a  yet  earlier  date,  during  his  visit  to 
Constantinople,  we  find  him  ready  to  pray  in  the 
Christian  Churches3,  and  it  is  probable  that  he  had 
scant  sympathy  with  those  Neoplatonists  who  still 
indulged  in  theurgy,  and  opposed  Christianity.  It 
has  been  suggested  that  his  conversion  was  brought 
about  by  two  main  causes,  "  a  deepening  sense  of  his 
own  difficulty  in  keeping  clean  from  matter,  and  a 
growing  sympathy  for  the  needs  and  sorrows  of 
common  people4."  In  other  words,  he  learned  by 
experience  the  defects  of  unaided  Neoplatonism  ;  its 

1  Socrates,  Hist.  Eccl.  6.  17. 

2  Glover,  Life  and  Letters  in  the  Fourth  Century,  p.  346. 

3  Hymn.  3.  448.  4  Glover,  p.  347. 


128  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

inability  to  raise  man  to  the  high  standard  which 
it  set  forth,  and  its  lack  of  a  message  for  any  but  the 
intellectual  few. 

At  the  same  time  Synesius  felt  no  difficulty  in 
maintaining  his  philosophical  tenets  side  by  side 
with  the  Christian  faith.  His  friendship  with  Hypatia 
was  interrupted  only  by  death,  and  in  spite  of 
the  recent  controversies,  he  boldly  proclaimed  his 
Origenistic  sympathies  before  he  would  permit  him- 
self to  be  consecrated  Bishop  of  Ptolemais.  He 
refused  to  give  up  his  belief  in  the  pre-natal  existence 
of  the  soul,  in  the  eternity  of  the  world,  and  in 
Origen's  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  of  the  body.  "If 
I  can  be  Bishop  on  these  terms,  philosophizing  at 
home  and  speaking  in  parables  abroad,  I  accept  the 
office.... What  have  the  people  to  do  with  Philosophy  ? 
Divine  truth  must  be  and  is  rightly  an  unspeakable 
mystery1."  He  adopts  in  fact  the  position  of  Origen, 
respecting  the  claim  of  the  "  man  in  the  congregation  " 
for  recognition  as  a  true  member  of  the  Church,  but 
reserving,  for  himself  and  those  like  him,  the  right 
to  maintain  an  esoteric  doctrine  to  which  ordinary 
persons  could  not  attain.  Happily  for  the  people 
of  Ptolemais,  and  happily  too  for  the  Church, 
Theophilus  of  Alexandria  was  willing  to  accept  him 
on  these  terms,  and  to  consecrate  the  man  who  so 
boldly  maintained  the  doctrines  which  he  had  himself 
elsewhere  endeavoured  to  stamp  out. 

We  must  not  linger  over  the  history  of  Synesius' 
episcopate.  As  our  knowledge  of  the  man  would 
lead  us  to  suppose,  it  was  marked  by  a  courageous 

1  Syn.  Ep.  105;  cf.  Nicoll,  Synesius,  p.  125. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  1 29 

championship  of  the  poor  and  suffering,  an  unflinching 
determination  to  attack  and  reprove  wrong  doing  in 
high  places,  and  a  readiness  to  protect  the  former 
wrong  doer  when  he  in  turn  was  threatened  with 
injustice.  Synesius  died  at  some  date  between  413 
and  431,  and  our  knowledge  of  the  Church  over 
which  he  presided  comes  to  a  close. 


VI 

It  now  remains  to  add  some  account  of  the  two 
writers  through  whose  works  the  ideas  of  Neoplatonism 
continued  to  influence  men's  thought  during  the 
Middle  Ages.  Both  of  them  were  acute  thinkers, 
strongly  influenced  by  the  school  of  Proclus :  one 
seems  to  have  been  a  monk,  connected  probably  with 
Edessa,  and  living  at  the  close  of  the  fifth  century ; 
the  other  was  one  of  the  most  famous  scholars  and 
statesmen  of  the  early  decades  of  the  sixth.  The 
name  of  the  statesman  was  Boethius,  the  name  of  the 
monk  is  unknown,  but  his  works  were  published 
under  the  pseudonym  of  '  Dionysius  the  Areopagite.' 

Let  us  first  turn  to  '  Dionysius1.'  We  find  the 
earliest  mention  of  his  writings  in  533  A.D.  when  an 
appeal  was  made  to  their  authority  by  the  Severians, 
a  monophysite  sect  at  Constantinople.  The  appeal 
was  disallowed  by  the  orthodox  party  on  the  ground 
that  a  work  of  the  Apostolic  age  which  was  unknown 
to  Cyril  and  Athanasius  was  hardly  to  be  considered 
authentic.  But  before  many  years  had  elapsed  the 
writings  won  their  way  to  wide-spread  popularity. 

1  See  Westcott,  Religious  Thought  in  the  West,  pp.  142  ff. 
E.  N.  Q 


I3O  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

It  is  true  that  Photius,  in  the  ninth  century,  pointed 
out  that  the  books  were  unknown  to  Eusebius  and 
the  early  Fathers,  and  that  they  contained  various 
anachronisms.  But  this  criticism  came  too  late 
to  interfere  with  the  influence  and  authority  of 
'  Dionysius.'  For  two  centuries  and  a  half  the  books 
had  been  quoted  with  respect  by  many  Greek  writers, 
and  in  827  A.D.,  fifteen  or  twenty  years  before  the 
date  of  Photius'  objections,  a  copy  of  the  writings 
presented  by  Michael  the  Stammerer  to  Louis  I  of 
France  had  been  enshrined  with  much  ceremony  in 
the  Abbey  of  St  Denis,  where  the  Areopagite  was 
reputed  to  have  been  buried.  From  that  moment 
their  position  in  Europe  was  secure.  Not  only  did 
the  works  of  '  Dionysius '  exercise  a  considerable 
influence  upon  Joannes  Scotus  in  the  ninth  century, 
but  from  the  twelfth  to  the  fifteenth  centuries  they 
formed  the  subject  of  a  whole  series  of  commentaries 
and  translations,  written  by  eminent  scholars  and 
ecclesiastics  of  the  day.  It  was  only  after  the  Re- 
naissance that  the  doubts  about  their  authenticity 
were  revived,  and  the  Dionysian  origin  of  the  books 
finally  disproved. 

It  was  not  without  reason  that  the  unknown 
author  assumed  a  title  which  suggested  the  combina- 
tion of  Christianity  with  Greek  philosophy.  In  the 
four  great  treatises  which  are  still  extant  we  find  a 
careful  attempt  to  show  that  the  teaching,  of  Proclus 
and  the  teaching  of  the  Church  supplement  and' 
illuminate  each  other.  In  the  first  treatise,  On  the 
Heavenly  Hierarchy ',  '  Dionysius '  describes  a  mighty 
series  or  system  of  creatures,  called  into  existence 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND  CHRISTIANITY  131 

by  God,  and  together  forming  an  immense  ladder  of 
being,  stretching  down  from  God's  throne.  At  every 
stage  in  this  series  there  is  a  certain  knowledge  of 
God  attainable  by  the  faithful  worshipper,  at  every 
stage  too  it  is  possible  for  him  to  climb  to  the  stage 
above,  where  he  will  gain  a  closer  fellowship  with 
the  Supreme  Being1.  Man  is  but  one  link  in  this 
mighty  chain,  and  man's  view  of  God  is  necessarily 
incomplete.  Man  is  finite  and  God  is  infinite,  so 
that  man  can  only  speak  and  think  of  God  in  finite 
and  imperfect  terms.  Yet  man's  knowledge  of  God, 
though  incomplete,  is  not  necessarily  false,  for  God 
reveals  Himself  to  man,  alike  in  the  world  around  us, 
and  by  special  means  which  He  has  employed  at 
various  times ;  and  if  man  makes  use  of  these 
opportunities,  God  will  lead  him  on  to  something 
higher. 

We  need  not  linger  over  the  details  of  the 
Heavenly  Hierarchy,  or  follow  'Dionysius'  as  he 
traces  out  the  functions  of  the  nine  orders  of  angels. 
We  pass  on  to  the  treatise  On  the  Ecclesiastical 
Hierarchy.  Here  we  learn  that  there  is  on  earth  an 
image  or  reflection  of  the  great  system  in  the  heavens. 
It  stands  on  a  lower  level  than  its  heavenly  counter- 
part, just  as  the  material  world  in  which  we  move 
is  on  a  lower  level  than  the  spiritual  world  in  which 
the  angels  have  their  being2.  Yet  the  Church,  the 
Ecclesiastical  Hierarchy,  is  none  the  less  divine  in 
origin,  and  it  has  a  mighty  task  entrusted  to  it.  It 
is  the  task  of  bringing  salvation  to  men  and  to  those 

1  Westcott,  R.T.W.^.\^i\  Dion,  de  Gael  Hier.  i.  3. 

2  DeEccl.Hier.  i.  2. 

9—2 


132  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

above  us, — a  salvation  that  consists  in  being  made 
like  God1.  The  doctrines  of  the  Ecclesiastical 
Hierarchy  have  been  enshrined  in  Holy  Scriptures, 
which  are  themselves  inspired  by  God ;  its  organiza- 
tion, and  the  sacraments  and  other  services  which 
it  employs,  symbolize  for  us  various  aspects  of  its 
fellowship  with  God.  The  writer  then  proceeds  to 
describe  in  detail  various  sacraments  and  ordinances 
of  the  Church,  adding  in  every  case  an  explanation 
of  the  symbolism. 

The  object  of  the  third  treatise,  On  the  Divine 
Names,  is  to  show  that,  while  we  cannot  know  God 
entirely  as  He  is,  we  are  yet  able,  by  the  right  use  of  our 
powers  and  opportunities,  to  obtain  a  partial  knowledge 
of  Him.  We  must  begin  by  asserting  the  Unity  of  God. 
God  is  above  all  One ;  all  that  exists  comes  from 
Him,  and  was  therefore  itself  originally  one.  And 
when  creation  comes  to  that  perfection  for  which 
God  has  designed  it,  it  will  be  completely  at  unity 
with  itself  and  with  Him2.  But  while  it  is  easy  to 
assert  the  Unity  of  God,  it  is  not  possible  to  comprehend 
it.  For  the  Unity  of  the  infinite  God  is  beyond  all 
mind,  and  most  of  all  is  it  beyond  the  comprehension 
of  our  minds.  At  the  same  time  there  are  names 
which  we  are  right  in  applying  to  God,  not  because 
they  give  a  complete  description  of  God,  but  because 
they  are  true  so  far  as  they  go,  and  describe  Him  so 
far  as  we  are  able  to  do  so.  Some  of  these  names 
apply  to  the  whole  Godhead,  for  instance  Being, 
Goodness  and  the  like.  Others,  as  Father,  Son, 
Word,  Spirit,  apply  to  particular  Persons,  But  both 

1  De  Eccl.  Hier.  1.3.  2  De  Div.  Nom.  2.  7,  4.  10. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND   CHRISTIANITY  133 

sets  of  terms  are  true,  and  both  are  inadequate,  since 
they  only  express  God  in  terms  suitable  for  our 
limited  understandings1. 

The  next  great  characteristic  of  God,  after  His 
Unity,  is  His  Goodness.  Just  as  the  sun,  because  it  is 
the  sun,  shines  on  all  alike,  so  God,  because  He  is 
God,  extends  His  love  to  all  His  creatures.  There  is 
no  corner  of  creation  beyond  His  reach  :  there  is  no 
creature  to  which  He  is  not  ready  to  show  Himself  a 
loving  Father.  Or,  in  other  words,  "  Everything  that 
is  is  from  the  fair  and  good,  and  is  in  the  fair  and 
good,  and  turns  to  the  fair  and  good2."  But  if  this 
be  so,  what  are  we  to  say  about  evil?  The  answer 
is  that  evil,  as  such,  has  no  real  existence.  It  is 
a  falling  short,  a  failure  to  reach  the  full  develop- 
ment of  which  this  or  that  creature  was  capable. 
Evil  objects  exist  in  abundance,  but  they  owe  their 
existence  to  the  fact  that  they  all  partake  in  some 
measure,  however  small,  of  good.  Evil  itself  is  a 
falling  short,  and  it  therefore  varies  according  to  the 
peculiar  character  of  every  object  in  which  it  is  said 
to  occur.  It  springs  from  defects  of  many  different 
kinds,  as  free  beings  fail  in  one  way  and  another  to 
reach  the  development  for  which  God  intended  them. 
"  But,"  says  {  Dionysius/  "  God  knows  the  evil  as  it  is 
good3."  He  looks,  that  is,  not  at  the  extent  to  which 
this  or  that  being  has  fallen  short  of  His  design,  but 
at  the  extent  to  which  it  is  fulfilling  it  And  it  is 
because  to  some  extent,  however  small,  the  evil  powers 
are  working  for  good,  that  He  allows  them  to  continue. 
In  the  case  of  man  the  matter  is  further  explained 

1  De  Div.  Nom.  i.  i.  2  Westcott,  R.  T.  W.  p.  179. 

3  De  Div.  Nom.  4.  30.     Westcott,  R.  T.  W.  p.  180. 


134  THE   RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

by  this,  that  God  has  given  man  freedom  of  choice, 
and  He  respects  the  free  will  that  He  has  given.  He 
will  not  compel  man  to  be  good  by  force. 

But  a  further  question  arises.  If  evil  has  no  real 
existence,  and  if  the  sinner  is  to  some  extent  working 
out  God's  purpose,  why  does  God  punish  him  ?  It 
is  because  God  gave  the  sinner  power  to  do  a  great 
deal  more  than  he  is  doing  towards  carrying  His 
purpose  into  effect,  and  He  punishes  the  negligence 
which  the  sinner's  free  choice  has  caused1.  'Dionysius' 
then  goes  on  to  show  that  all  creation  is  in  harmony 
with  God.  The  purpose  for  which  it  was  made,  and 
the  gradual  realisation  of  that  purpose  both  owe  their 
existence  to  God,  and  are  derived  from  Him. 

In  the  last  treatise,  On  Mystical  Theology 
'  Dionysius '  tries  to  carry  us  a  little  further.  He 
endeavours  to  enable  the  reader  to  rise  above  the 
world  that  we  can  see  and  touch  and  think  about, 
and  to  secure  a  truer  knowledge  of  God  by  laying 
aside  every  form  of  thought  or  expression  which 
seems  to  limit  Him  to  the  things  of  this  world.  In 
the  work  On  the  Divine  Names  the  method  employed 
is  for  the  most  part  affirmative.  The  writer  takes  the 
names  which  describe  God's  nature  and  expounds 
their  meaning.  In  the  present  work  the  negative 
method  naturally  predominates,  and  God  is  described, 
not  by  the  attributes  which  He  possesses,  but  by  the 
limitations  from  which  He  is  free. 

The    style    of    '  Dionysius '    is     wearisome     and 

verbose,  and  it  is  easy  to  quote  phrases  and  paragraphs 

which  appear  to  the  modern  reader  to  be  meaningless 

jargon.     But  the  foregoing  summary  will   suffice  to 

1  De  Div.  Nom.  4.  35. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  135 

show  that  '  Dionysius '  made  a  real  contribution  to 
human  thought,  and  that  apart  from  the  title  which 
he  assumed,  his  works  contained  a  living  message  for 
those  who  could  understand  them. 

The  personal  history  of  *  Dionysius '  can  only  be 
pieced  together  from  the  internal  evidence  of  his 
writings.  With  Boethius  however  the  case  is  different1. 
His  father,  Aurelius  Manlius  Boethius,  held  various 
important  posts  under  Odovacar,  rising  to  the  consul- 
ship in  487  A.D.  Anicius  Manlius  Severinus  Boethius 
was  born  in  or  about  the  year  480,  and  though  he 
was  yet  a  mere  child  when  his  father  died,  he  was 
carefully  educated  by  his  kinsmen  Festus  and 
Symmachus.  He  learned  Greek  and  was  soon 
attracted  by  Greek  works  on  science  and  philosophy  of 
all  kinds,  many  of  which  he  translated  for  the  benefit 
of  his  Latin-speaking  contemporaries.  He  also  wrote 
several  commentaries  on  the  works  of  Aristotle,  and 
composed  a  series  of  Theological  Tracts  in'which  he 
attempted  to  apply  philosophical  methods  to  the  current 
doctrinal  controversies.  Boethius  must  have  become 
acquainted  with  Theodoric  soon  after  that  Emperor's 
arrival  in  Rome  in  the  year  504 :  for  we  find  him  elected 
Sole  Consul  in  510,  and  he  enjoyed  the  Emperor's 
favour  long  enough  to  see  his  two  sons  elevated  to 
the  Consulship  in  522.  But  suddenly  his  fortune 
changed.  An  injudicious  speech  in  praise  of  old 
Roman  freedom  awakened  Theodoric's  suspicions : 
Boethius  was  arraigned  and  imprisoned,  and  after  being 
condemned  by  the  Senate  he  was  tortured  and  put 
to  death  with  a  club. 

1  Cf.  H.  F.  Stewart,  Boethius. 


136  THE  RELATIONS   BETWEEN  [V 

During  his  imprisonment  he  wrote  five  books  On 
the  Consolation  of  Philosophy.  In  the  first  book  he 
describes  himself  in  the  prison,  weeping  and  striving 
in  vain  to  distract  his  thoughts  by  writing  verses. 
Suddenly  there  appears  before  him  the  stately  figure 
of  Philosophy.  She  is  a  woman,  venerable  in  appear- 
ance yet  ever  young,  clad  in  a  robe  of  her  own 
weaving,  holding  a  book  in  one  hand  and  a  sceptre  in 
the  other.  She  drives  away  the  Muses,  and  stays 
herself  to  comfort  the  prisoner.  In  the  remainder 
of  the  work  Boethius  tells  how  his  mysterious  visitor 
reasoned  with  him,  brushing  aside  his  anger  against 
Fortune,  who  is  a  true  friend  only  when  she  frowns : 
showing  how  insufficient  are  the  aims  which  most 
men  seek  to  achieve,  and  pointing  out  that  while  the 
triumph  of  the  wicked  in  the  world  is  always  more 
apparent  than  real,  their  punishment  is  swift  and 
inevitable.  This  leads  on  to  a  discussion  about  the 
difference  between  Providence  and  Fate,  and  the 
relation  of  both  to  the  divine  Simplicity :  and  the 
work  closes  with  an  elaborate  discussion  of  man's 
free  will,  as  it  exists  side  by  side  with  the  fore- 
knowledge of  God. 

It  is  remarkable  that  in  this  work  the  leading 
ideas  of  Christianity  should  be  almost  entirely 
omitted.  There  is  no  reason  to  suppose  that  Boethius 
was  a  heathen.  The  Theological  Tracts  show  clearly 
enough  that  he  was  well  acquainted  with  western 
theology ;  and  yet  in  the  books  with  which  he  solaced 
the  dreariness  of  his  imprisonment  there  is  no  word 
about  a  Redeemer.  The  standpoint  from  which  he 
writes  is  throughout  that  of  the  Neoplatonist,  and  the 


V]  NEOPLATONISM   AND   CHRISTIANITY  137 

references  to  Christianity  are  few  and  far  between. 
Are  we  to  suppose  that  Boethius  had  given  up 
all  faith  in  the  Gospel  and  turned  instead  to  the 
consolations  of  Philosophy  ?  Yet  if  that  were  so  we 
should  expect  to  find  some  expression  of  disappoint- 
ment or  bitterness  against  the  support  that  had  failed 
him.  Another  explanation  has  however  been  sug- 
gested1. The  style  of  the  treatise  is  throughout  cold 
and  formal,  and  it  may  be  that  it  was  written,  like  the 
verses  which  Boethius  was  composing  when  Philosophy 
appeared,  merely  to  while  away  the  tedious  hours  of 
confinement.  If  this  be  so,  we  should  be  mistaken 
in  regarding  the  work  as  the  expression  of  Boethius' 
ultimate  grounds  of  confidence,  and  must  look  on  it 
rather  as  a  task  undertaken  in  order  to  distract  his 
attention  during  a  time  of  suspense.  If  this  theory 
be  accepted,  the  treatise  loses  somewhat  in  reality, 
but  we  have  at  the  same  time  a  key  to  a  problem 
which  might  otherwise  be  difficult  to  solve. 

The  popularity  of  Boethius  in  the  Middle  Ages 
was  extraordinary2.  It  would  be  difficult  to  find  a 
secular  writer  whose  works  were  more  often  translated 
or  more  widely  read.  In  our  own  land  his  influence 
is  to  be  traced  in  Beowulf,  the  earliest  of  Anglo- 
Saxon  epics  (c.  800  A.D.),  whilst  the  Consolation  of 
Philosophy  was  translated  or  paraphrased  by  King 
Alfred  (878),  and  in  later  days  by  Chaucer  (1340- 
1400).  Nor  were  other  countries  less  willing  to  do 
him  honour.  Between  the  eleventh  and  the  fourteenth 
centuries  translations  of  the  Consolation  were  published 
in  France,  Italy,  Germany,  Spain  and  Greece,  and 

1  Stewart,  p.  106.  2  See  Stewart,  Boethius,  c.  vi. 


138  THE   RELATIONS  BETWEEN  [V 

indirect  references  are  to  be  found  in  many  poems 
and  romances  as  well.  The  fame  and  influence  of 
'  Dionysius '  and  of  Boethius  alike,  have  long  since 
died  away.  There  are  few  persons  of  ordinary 
culture  to-day  who  could  if  asked  either  tell  the 
names  or  describe  the  contents  of  their  writings. 
Nor  is  the  reason  difficult  to  find.  They  transmitted 
to  the  Middle  Ages  something  of  the  spirit  of  Greek 
philosophy,  and  in  so  doing  they  conferred  a  great 
and  lasting  benefit.  But  when  in  the  fifteenth  century 
learning  revived,  and  men  began  once  more  to  study 
the  Greek  classics  for  themselves,  the  lustre  of 
'  Dionysius '  and  Boethius  was  bound  to  wane. 
They  had  done  their  work,  and  when  the  literature 
from  which  their  inspiration  was  derived  came  to  be 
widely  known  and  read,  they  relapsed  into  comparative 
obscurity. 


It  is  impossible,  within  the  bounds  of  this  essay, 
to  trace  the  influence  of  Neoplatonism  upon  medi- 
aeval and  modern  thought.  The  speculations  of 
Joannes  Scotus,  and  their  reception  by  the  theologians 
of  his  time,  the  rise  of  the  Cambridge  Platonists  in 
the  seventeenth  century,  the  attention  that  is  paid  to- 
day, alike  to  Plotinus  and  his  school,  and  to  the 
Christian  Fathers  who  in  part  reflect  their  teaching, 
show  clearly  that  the  force  of  Neoplatonism  did  not 
perish  when  Justinian  closed  the  lecture-rooms.  But 
these  themes,  attractive  and  fascinating  as  they  are, 
would  carry  us  far  beyond  the  limits  of  the  present 
work. 


V]  NEOPLATONISM  AND   CHRISTIANITY  139 

Two  questions  however  remain  upon  which  a  few 
words  may  be  added.  What  caused  the  failure  of 
Neoplatonism  to  hold  its  own  against  the  spread  of 
Christianity,  and  what  was  the  contribution  that  it 
made  to  the  development  of  Christian  theology  ?  To 
the  first  of  these  questions  the  answer  would  seem  to 
be,  that  Neoplatonism  even  in  its  highest  and  purest 
form,  was  incapable  of  answering  all  the  questions 
which  man  seeks  to  solve.  It  dealt  exclusively  with 
abstract  Principles.  It  spoke  of  a  supreme  Being, 
but  never  of  a  personal  God.  It  told  of  beauty  and 
goodness,  but  never  of  love.  And  therefore  it  failed 
to  claim  the  allegiance  of  the  whole  man.  It  was  in 
fact  throughout  an  intellectual  system,  and  it  could 
never  satisfy  the  cravings  of  the  human  heart. 

But,  with  regard  to  the  second  question,  it  would 
-be  a  mistake  to  suppose  that  Neoplatonism  made  no 
contribution  to  Christian  theology.  "  In  divers  por- 
tions and  in  divers  manners,"  God  spake  "in  time 
past  to  the  fathers  in  the  prophets1."  Little  by  little, 
as  man  was  able  to  receive  it,  the  message  was  given. 
And,  though  the  revelation  was  completed  once  and 
for  all,  in  the  coming  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  it  was 
still  necessary  for  its  content  to  be  worked  out  and 
assimilated.  And  Neoplatonism,  under  the  guiding 
hand  of  God,  helped  to  bring  out  some  aspects  of  the 
truth  which  might  otherwise  have  long  remained  un- 
noticed. The  earliest  Christians,  trained  under  the 
strict  discipline  of  the  Jewish  law,  had  received  defi- 
nite teaching  about  the  unity  and  the  eternal  existence 
of  God.  They  knew  that  the  world  was  made  by 

1  Heb.  i.  i. 


140  NEOPLATONISM   AND    CHRISTIANITY  [V 

Him,  and  that  it  is  not  co-extensive  with  Him.  They 
knew  also  that  He  is  not  the  author  of  evil,  and  that 
the  evil  in  the  world  is  not  destined  to  be  eternal. 
But  soon  the  Gospel  spread  to  men  and  races  un- 
familiar with  these  doctrines,  and  there  was  a  danger 
that  they  would  be  allowed  to  lapse.  It  was  the  task 
of  the  Neoplatonists,  through  the  Christians  who 
came  under  their  influence,  once  more  to  draw  men's 
attention  to  such  truths  as  these,  and  to  prevent  them 
from  falling  into  oblivion.  This  was  its  work  in  the 
third  and  fourth  centuries,  when  so  many  of  the  doc- 
trines of  Christian  theology  were  taking  definite  shape. 
And  its  reappearance  from  time  to  time  in  the  ages 
that  have  followed  has  served  as  a  witness  that  the 
eternal  verities  are  still  beyond  human  comprehension. 
It  reminds  us  that  our  theology  should  be  a  living 
organism,  that  we  must  not  be  contented  merely  to 
repeat  the  formulae  of  an  earlier  age,  but  strive  con- 
stantly after  fuller  knowledge  and  closer  fellowship 
with  the  Divine. 


INDEX 


Academy,  Old,  Middle  and  New, 

Aedesius,  68 

Aetius,  122 

Alexander  Severus,  20  f. 

Alexander  the  False  Prophet,  2 

Alexandrian  Philosophy : 
Jewish,  23,  32 
Christian,  41 
Neoplatonic,  52,  72 

Allegorical  Interpretation,  14,  32, 
93  f-.  121 

Ambrose,   79,   in 

Amelius,  30,  92 

Ammonius  Saccas,  26,  33,  50,  51 

Anastasius,   126 

Anaxagoras,   24,  26 

Anebon,  Letter  to,  61 

Antiochus,   29 

Antoninus  Pius,  12 

Apollonius  of  Tyana,  19 ;  jour- 
ney to  India,  39;  compared  to 
Christ  by  Hierocles,  67,  88 ; 
Philostratus's  memoir  compared 
with  the  Gospels,  84;  absence 
of  reference  to  Christianity,  87, 
89 

Arcesilas,  29 

Arian  controversy,   105,   122 

Aristotle,  29,  31,  35,  74 

Athanasius,   105,   122 

Augustine,  71,  110-119:  life, 
nof. ;  Neoplatonism  his  half- 
way house,  1 1 1  ;  doctrine  of 
the  Being  of  God,  112;  doc- 
trine of  the  Holy  Trinity  com- 
pared with  that  of  Plotinus, 


H3f.  ;  relation  of  God  to 
creation,  115  ;  problem  of  evil, 
116;  controversy  with  Pela- 
gius,  119 

Basil  of  Caesarea,  79,  122 

Beowulf,  137 

Boethius,  76 ;    life  and  writings, 

135  f. ;    mediaeval  translations, 

137  f. 

Cappadocian  Fathers,  79,   122 

Caracalla,  20 

Carneades,  29 

Catechetical  School,  44 

Celsus,  8,   1 6,  39 

Chrysostom,  John,  79 

Clement  of  Alexandria,  life  and 
writings,  45  ;  his  aim,  47 ;  his 
theology,  48-50 ;  studied  by 
Hilary,  109 

Clement  of  Rome,   16 

Confessions  of  St  Augustine^  92 

Cynics,  32 

Cyprian,  78 

Cyril  of  Alexandria,  79 

Daemons,  8,  37 
Damascius,  76 
Damis,   19,  84 
De  Mysteriis,  62-64 
Demetrius  of  Alexandria,   121 
Democritus,  31  f. 
Dio  Cassius,   5,  20 
Diodore,  79 

'  Dionysius  the  Areopagite,'  80, 
83;  date  of,  129;  popularity, 


I42 


INDEX 


130;  writings,  130-134;  doc- 
trine of  God,  132  f . ;  problem 
of  evil,  133  f. 

Ecstasy,  36,   50,  58 

Egyptian  deities,   10 

Elagabalus,  20 

Eleatics,   25 

Emperor,  worship  of,  6 

Epicureans,  3,  31,  47 

Epiphanius,  79,   124,   126 

Eunapius,  20,  53,  71 

Eusebius  of  Caesarea,  52,  78 ; 
his  answer  to  Hierocles,  67 ; 
his  twofold  attitude  towards 
Neoplatonism,  103  f. ;  his  de- 
fence of  Origen,  122,  126 

Eusebius  of  Myndus,  68 

Evil  a  lack  of  good,  57,  97,  116, 
133 

Genii,  7 

Gnosticism,  43,  89 

Good,   The,  48,   55 

Gordianus,   i,   53 

Gregory  of  Nazianzus,  79,   122 

Gregory  of  Nyssa,  79,  122 

Gregory  Thaumaturgus,   77 

Heraclas,   121 

Heraclides,   29 

Heraclitus,  23,  26 

Herennius,  52  f. 

Hierocles  of  Alexandria,  73 

Hierocles  of  Bithynia,  66  f.,  88 

Hilary,   79,   109  f. 

Hypatia,  72f. 

lamblichus,  life  of  Pythagoras, 
25,  29 ;  his  elaboration  of 
Plotinus'  system,  65  ;  his  love 
of  theurgy,  66 

Ideas,  27,  29,  30,  35,  37,  48,  55 

Jerome,   79,   125,   127 

Joannes  Scotus,  83,    130 

Julia  Domna,   18,  86 

Julian,  68-70,  106-108 ;  his 
system,  69^;  his  attitude  to- 
wards Christianity,  106 ;  his 
writings  against  the  Christians 


and  his  educational  edict,  107 ; 
his  attempt  to  reform  pagan- 
ism, 108 

Justin  Martyr,   13,  43,  45 

Justinian,  71,  76,    100 

Juvenal,  5 

Lampridius,  5,   20 
Logos,  23,  34,  48,  89,   122 
Longinus,  31,  52,  60 
Lucian,  if.,    12 

Manicheism,   no 

Marcella,  61 

Marcus  Aurelius,   12,   38 

Marinus,  76 

Matter,  37,  56,  57 

Maximus,  68 

Melissus,  25 

Methodius,  77,   122 

Metrodorus,  32 

Mind,  24,  55  f.,  89 

Minucius  Felix,   78 

Mithras,   1 1  f. ,  70 

Monnica,   no 

Montanism,  3 

Mysteries,   3,    11,  16,  45,   54 

Nature,  55 

Neopythagoreanism,   15,   19,   38 
Ntimber,  25,   29,  38 
Numenius,  38 

Odovacar,   135 

One,   The,  34,  55 

Origen,  5,  18,  45,  52,  60,  77: 
Origen  compared  -with  the 
Neoplatonists,  91-103:  doc- 
trines common  to  both, 
92  f. ;  use  of  allegorical 
interpretation,  93 f.;  trans- 
migration of  soul,  96  ;  the 
problem  of  evil,  97;  sub- 
ordination of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  97  f.  ;  resurrection 
of  the  body,  99  f. ;  classes 
of  worship,  102 
Later  influence  of  Origen: 
on  Hilary,  109 ;  on  Alex- 
andrian theology,  121 ;  on 
the  Arian  question,  122 ; 


INDEX 


143 


upheld  by  Athanasius,  122; 
on  the  Cappadocian  Fa- 
thers, 123  ;  on  Jerome  and 
Rufinus,  125;  attacked  by 
Epiphanius,  124;  on  Sy- 
nesius,  128 

Origenes  the  Neoplatonist,  52  f. 

Origenistic  controversies,  1 20- 
129 

Paedagogus,  46 

Pagan  revival,  4 

Pamphilus,   122,   126 

Pantaenus,  44 

Parmenides,   25 

Pelagianism,   119 

Peregrinus,  2,  4 

Philo  Byblius,  62 

Philo  Judaeus,  24,  33-37,  42 ; 
doctrine  of  the  Logos,  34 ; 
teaching  about  the  Powers,  35 ; 
about  creation,  36 ;  about  Ec- 
stasy, 36 ;  influence  on  Plotinus, 
89 ;  on  Origen,  102  ;  on  Hi- 
lary, 109 

Philostratus,   16,   19,   39,  84 

Phoenix,  16 

Photius,  130 

Pierius,   121 

Plato,    26,    27,    30,    32,    34,    38, 

45 

Plotinus : 

Plotinus  and  earlier  systems, 
22-40 :  Pythagoras,  25 ; 
the  Eleatics  and  Being, 
25  f. ;  Plato  and  Ideas,  27  ; 
the  Academy,  29;  Aristotle, 
30;  the  Stoics,  31  ;  Philo 
and  Ecstasy,  36  ;  Plutarch, 
37  ;  Clement  of  Alexandria 
and  Ecstasy,  50 

Plotinus1  life  and  system,  51 
-60:  life,  53  f.,  60; 
writings,  53  f.  ;  his  teach- 
ing based  on  intuition,  54 ; 
on  his  three  First  Prin- 
ciples, 55  ;  nature,  56 ; 
creation,  56  ;  matter,  56  ; 
evil,  57 ;  psychology  and 
ethics,  58 ;  Ecstasy,  58 

Plotinus  and  later  Neoplato- 


nist s,  60-76 ;  modifications 
of  his  system  by  lambli- 
chus,  65  f.  ;  by  Julian,  69 ; 
by  Proclus,  74  f. 
Plotinus  and  Christianity, 
82-138 :  contemporary 
Christian  Fathers,  77;  his 
silence  with  regard  to 
Christianity,  84,  88-90 ; 
Plotinus  and  Origen,  91- 
100 ;  on  transmigration, 
96 ;  on  evil,  97 ;  on  the 
subordination  of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  97-98 ;  on  the  pro- 
gress of  the  soul,  100 ;  the 
circles  addressed  by  Plo- 
tinus and  Origen,  103  ;  Plo- 
tinus and  Eusebius,  104 ; 
Athanasius,  105  ;  Plotinus 
and  Augustine,  112 — 118; 
on  the  Being  of  God,  112  ; 
the  Trinity,  H3f.;  creation, 
115  ;  evil,  116-118 

Plutarch  of  Chaeronea,   14,  37 

Plutarch  of  Athens,   74 

Porphyry,  life  of  Plotinus,  and 
Pythagoras,  25  ;  pamphlet,  30  ; 
editor  of  the  Enneads,  53  ;  life 
and  writings,  60  f.  ;  attack  on 
Christianity,  62,  101  ;  opposi- 
tion to  theurgy,  62 

Powers,  35 

Proclus,   74-76 

Protrepticus ;  45 

Pythagoras,  25,  38,  48,  6r 

Rufinus,   79,  125-127 

Sallustius,   71 

Septimius  Severus,   i,   18 

Sextus  Empiricus,  39 

Simplicius,  76 

Socrates,  26 

Sopater,  68 

Speusippus,  29 

Stoics,  31,  36,  38,  47 

Stromates,  46 

Synesius,  pupil  of  Hypatia,  72; 
his  philosophy,  73 ;  conversion 
to  Christianity,  127;  Origenistic 


144 


INDEX 


doctrines,  128 ;  Bishop  of  Ptole-       Theophilus  of  Alexandria,   127  f. 
mais,  80,    128  Theurgy,  62 

Syrianus,  74 


Tacitus,  1 6 

TauroboliMm,  1 3 

Tertullian,   7,  9,  13,  16,   18,  44 

Thales,   22 

Themistius,  71 

Theodore  of  Mopsuestia,  79 

Theodoret,   79 

Theodoric,   135 

Theognostus,   121 


Theurgy, 
Victorinus,   125 

World- soul,  55 


Xenocrates,  29 
Xenophanes,  25 
Xenophon,  26 

Zeno,   25 


CAMBRIDGE  :    PRINTED   BY  JOHN  CLAY,    M.A.    AT   THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


^^CQ 

:   RFC'D  LD 

m  •»  r--.?/!  .-:  ps« 

•*  !P  "  *    ^  j  l\1 

/  \US*^ 

REC'D  I 

JD 

AU6  2  1'65  - 

9  A,M 

l7aeptSMs 

REC'D  LD 

8EP20'65-3PM 

ocn^nwi* 


ll  1969 


RECEIVED 


R  3f69-2P 


tOAN  DEPT. 


LD  21A-40m-ll,'63 
(E1602slO)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


\8V30l 


A. 


'•8 

5/7 
E6 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY